C5_en_Chap00_couverture_ed01-2016
Handbook
C5_en_Chap00_couverture_ed01-2016
On-line handbook
If the "MyCITROËN" function is not available on the CITROËN public website for your country, you
can nd your handbook at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
Find your handbook on the CITROËN website, under "MyCITROËN".
Select:
Select one of the following means of access to
view your handbook on-line...
This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct and special contact with the
manufacturer.
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.
Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives
you access to the latest information available,
easily identied by the bookmark, associated
with this symbol:
This handbook has been designed to help you make the
most of your C5 in all circumstances and in complete
safety.
Take the time to read through it so as to familiarise
yourself with your vehicle.
Key
safety warning
additional information
contributes to the protection of the environment
This handbook covers all of the variations in equipment
available across the whole C5 range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the
equipment described in this document, depending on its
trim level, version and the specification for the country in
which it was sold.
CITROËN has a presence on every continent,
a complete product range,
bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,
for a modern and creative approach to mobility.
We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.
Happy motoring!
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
getting to know each system,
each control, each setting,
makes your trips, your journeys
more comfortable and more enjoyable.
The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications
only.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the
technical characteristics, equipment and accessories
without having to update this edition of the handbook.
This document forms an integral part of your vehicle.
Remember to pass it on to the new owner in the event of
the sale of the vehicle.
Contents
C5_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2016
Instrument panels 14
Trip computer 17
Indicators 21
Distance recorders 25
Warning and indicator lamps 26
Monochrome screen C 37
Touch screen tablet 39
Front seats 60
Steering wheel adjustment 65
Mirrors 66
Rear seats 68
Ventilation 70
Dual-zone digital air conditioning 72
Courtesy lamps 76
Interior mood lighting 77
Panoramic sunroof (Tourer) 79
Front ttings 81
Mats 82
Front armrest 83
Rear ttings 84
Boot ttings 86
Driving recommendations 91
Starting-switching off the engine 92
Manual parking brake 95
Electric parking brake 96
Hill start assist 103
6-speed manual gearbox 104
Automatic gearbox 105
Gear shift indicator 109
Stop & Start 110
Tyre under-ination detection 114
Fixed centred controls steering wheel 116
Speed limiter 118
Cruise control 121
Lane departure warning system 124
Parking space sensors 125
Parking sensors 127
Reversing camera (Tourer) 129
"Hydractive III +" electronic suspension 130
Remote control key 44
Alarm 49
Electric windows 52
Doors 54
Boot 57
Instruments
Overview Access
Ease of use and comfort
Driving
Eco-driving
Contents
C5_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2016
Fuel tank 175
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 177
Snow chains 178
Energy economy mode 179
Towing a trailer 180
Roof bars 182
Very cold climate protection 183
Cold climate screen 184
Bonnet 185
Petrol engines 186
Diesel engines 187
Checking levels 188
Checks 192
AdBlue
®
and SCR system
(BlueHDi Diesel) 195
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 203
Temporary puncture repair kit 204
Changing a wheel 211
Changing a bulb 218
Changing a fuse 229
12 V battery 235
Towing the vehicle 239
Petrol engines 241
Petrol weights 242
Diesel engines 243
Diesel weights 244
Dimensions 245
Identication markings 249
Emergency or assistance 250
7-inch touch screen tablet 253
Audio system 315
Lighting controls 132
Automatic illumination of headlamps 136
Headlamp adjustment 137
Directional lighting 138
Wiper controls 140
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers 142
General safety recommendations 144
Direction indicators 145
Hazard warning lamps 145
Horn 146
Emergency or assistance call 146
Braking assistance systems 147
Trajectory control systems 148
Seat belts 151
Airbags 154
Child seats 159
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 162
ISOFIX child seats 169
Child lock 173
Safety
Practical information
In the event of a breakdown
Technical dataLighting and visibility
Alphabetical index
Audio and telematics
Overview
4
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Exterior (Saloon)
Roof bars 182
Changing bulbs 222-223, 226
- rear lamps
- 3
rd
brake lamp
- number plate lamps
Boot 57
Temporary puncture repair kit 204-210
Changing a wheel 211-217
- tools
- removing
AdBlue
®
, topping-up 200-202
Tyre under-inflation detection 114-115
Braking assistance 147
Trajectory control 148-150
Tyre pressures 114, 249
Snow chains 178
Fuel tank 175-176
Misfuel prevention 177
Remote control key 44-48
- opening / closing
- battery
Ignition switch / Steering lock /
Starting 92-94
Alarm 49-51
Door mirrors 66
Exterior lighting controls 132-136
Headlamp adjustment 137
Changing bulbs 218-221
- front lamps
- Xenon headlamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Lane departure warning system 124
Stop & Start 110-113
Very cold climate screen 184
Doors 54-56
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Child lock 173
Electric windows 52-53
Front and/or rear parking
sensors 127-128
Towbar 180-181
Towing 239-240
.Overview
5
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Exterior (Tourer)
Panoramic sunroof 79-80
Roof bars 182
Changing bulbs 224-226
- rear lamps
- 3rd brake lamp
- number plate lamps
Boot 58-59
Reversing camera 129
Temporary puncture
repair kit 204-210
Changing a wheel 211-217
- tools
- removing
AdBlue
®
, topping-up 200-202
Tyre under-inflation detection 114-115
Braking assistance 147
Trajectory control 148-150
Tyre pressures 114, 249
Snow chains 178
Remote control key 44-48
- opening / closing
- battery
Ignition switch / Steering lock /
Starting 92-94
Alarm 49-51
Fuel tank 175-176
Misfuel prevention 177
Door mirrors 66
Exterior lighting controls 132-136
Headlamp adjustment 137
Changing bulbs 218-221
- front lamps
- Xenon headlamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Lane departure warning system 124
Stop & Start 110-113
Very cold climate screen 184
Doors 54-56
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Child lock 173
Electric windows 52-53
Front and/or rear parking
sensors 127-128
Towbar 180-181
Towing 239-240
Overview
6
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Interior
Boot fittings (Saloon) 86
- securing rings
Boot fittings (Tourer) 87
- securing rings
- hooks
- storage net...
Luggage cover (Tourer) 88
Luggage retaining net (Tourer) 89-90
Temporary puncture repair kit 204-210
Access to the spare
wheel / tools 211-213
Child seats 159-168
ISOFIX mountings 169-172
Child lock 173
Rear seats 68-69
Rear fittings 84-85
- rear armrest
- ski ap
- 12 V socket...
Front seats 60-64
Seat belts 151-153
Airbags 154-158
Side blinds 85
Front fittings 81-83
- sun visor
- glove box
- mats
- front armrest
- USB port/Jack auxiliary socket...
.Overview
7
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Instruments and controls
Instrument panels 14-16
Trip computer 17, 19
Warning lamps 26-36
Indicators 21-25
Buttons 25
- trip recorder
- lighting dimmer
Gear shift indicator 109
Parking space sensors 125-126
Windows 52-53
Door mirrors 66
Opening the bonnet 185
Dashboard fuses 229-232
Manual gearbox 104
Automatic gearbox 105-108
Hill start assist 103
Courtesy lamps 76-78
Rear view mirror 67
Interior mood lighting 77
Sun visor 81
Parking brake, manual 95
Parking brake, electric 96-102
"Hydractive III +" electronic
suspension 130-131
Multifunction screens 37-43
Trip computer 18-19
Hazard warning lamps 145
Ventilation 70-71
Dual-zone digital air
conditioning 71-75
Emergency or assistance
call 146, 250-251
Touch screen tablet 253-314
Setting the date/time 42-43
Audio system 315-332
Setting the date/time 38
Steering wheel adjustment 65
Glove box 81
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag 155-156, 161-164
Overview
8
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Instruments and controls
1. ASR/DSC 148-150
2. Visual and audible parking
sensor system 127-128
3. Lane departure warning
system 124
Central switch panels
4. Central locking 54-55
5. Localised Assistance
Call 146, 250-251
6. Localised Emergency Call 146, 250-251
With the touch screen tablet
1. Main menu for the touch screen
tablet 39-40, 257
2. Increase volume 40, 255
3. Decrease volume 40, 255
4. Central locking 54-55
5. Localised Assistance
Call 146, 250-251
6. Localised Emergency Call 146, 250-251
With the Audio system
.Overview
9
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
1. CHECK (vehicle self-test) 20
2. Volumetric alarm 49-51
3. Parking space sensor system 125-126
Side switch panel
4. Stop & Start 110-113
With the touch screen tablet
1. CHECK (vehicle self-test) 20
2. Volumetric alarm 49-51
3. Parking space sensor system 125-126
4. Lane departure warning
system 124
5. Stop & Start 110-113
6. ASR/DSC 148-150
With the Audio system
Overview
10
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Exterior lighting 132-136
Automatic illumination of headlamps 146
Daytime running lamps 135
Direction indicators 145
Instruments and controls
Speed limiter 118-120
Cruise control 121-123
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 140-143
Wash-wipe 141
Automatic wiping 142
Headlamp adjustment 137
Main menu - Instrument panel
screen 15-16
Trip computer 17, 19
Fixed centred controls steering
wheel 116 -117
Bluetooth
®
telephone 283, 300-307, 298-305
Horn 146
Navigation 258-271
Radio / Media 272-283, 318-323
Selection of the displayed function -
MODE 37, 256
Main menu - Audio system 38, 318
Main menu - Touch screen tablet 41, 257
Voice recognition - MirrorLink™
or CarPlay
®
256, 292-297
Black Panel 256, 317
Audio controls - Audio system 317
Audio controls - Touch screen tablet 256
Steering mounted controls
.Overview
11
C5_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Technical data - Maintenance
Petrol engines 241
Petrol weights 242
Diesel engines 243
Diesel weights 244
Dimensions (Saloon) 245-246
Dimensions (Tourer) 247-248
Identification markings 249
Opening the bonnet 185
Petrol under-bonnet layout 186
Diesel under-bonnet layout 187
Running out of fuel - Diesel 203
Checking the levels 188-191
- oil
- brake uid
- power steering uid
- coolant
- screenwash / headlamp wash uid
AdBlue
®
195-202
Very cold climate protection 183
Changing bulbs 218-228
- front
- rear
- interior
Checking components 192-194
- battery
- air / passenger compartment lter
- oil lter
- particle lter (Diesel)
- brake pads / discs
Battery 235-238
Energy economy mode 179
Engine compartment
fuses 229, 233-234
Eco-driving
12
C5_EN_CHAP00C_ECO-CONDUITE_ED01-2016.
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting.
During acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic
mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it
by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents
open.
Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as
soon as the desired temperature is attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light
does not require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions.
The gear efficiency indicator invites you to engage the most suitable
gear: as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel,
follow it straight away.
For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions and also help to reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
.Eco-driving
13
C5_EN_CHAP00C_ECO-CONDUITE_ED01-2016.
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof
bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on
maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
the door aperture, driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter,
passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of
operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay to have the emissions of nitrogen oxides brought back to
the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.
Instruments
14
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Instrument panels - petrol and Diesel
A. Fuel gauge
B. Indicator:
● Coolant temperature
● Cruise control/Speed limiter information
C. Analogue speedometer
D. Rev counter
E. Indicator:
● Engine oil temperature
● Gear efficiency.
● Gear selector position and gear engaged
(automatic gearbox).
F. Controls:
● Lighting dimmer
● Reset the trip mileage recorder and
service indicator
G. Instrument panel screen indicating:
● Depending on the page selected with the
left-hand thumb wheel on the steering
wheel:
- Digital speed repeater
- Trip computer
- Navigation (guidance) information
- Display of message alerts
- Engine oil level indicator
- Service indicator
● Permanently:
- Trip mileage recorder
- Total mileage recorder
● Temporarily:
- Service indicator.
- Engine oil level indicator.
- Alert messages.
Panel grouping together the dials and vehicle operation indicator and warning lamps.
1
Instruments
15
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
* Only with the Audio system.
The instrument screen A is located in the
centre of the instrument panel.
- With the vehicle stationary, you can access
the main menu of the screen by quickly
pressing on the left-hand thumb wheel B
on the steering wheel.
- Whilst driving, the message "Action
impossible while driving" is displayed in
the instrument panel if you try to open the
main menu.
"Vehicle parameters" menu*
This allows you to access the settings for
certain functions, grouped by category:
- Access to the vehicle.
- Lighting.
- Driving assistance.
"Choice of language" menu
This allows you to choose the display and voice
recognition language.
Main menu
The main menu allows you to programme
certain vehicle functions* and the instrument
panel screen:
"Choice of units" menu
This allows you to choose metric or imperial
units.
Instruments
16
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Driving assistance
With this menu selected, you can:
F activate or deactivate the operation of the
rear wiper in reverse gear.
For more information on the
Wiper control stalk, refer to the
corresponding section.
** Depending on the country of sale.
Access to the vehicle
With this menu selected, you can:
F activate or deactivate the driver welcome
function.
For more information on Ease of use and
comfort, refer to the corresponding section.
F select the unlocking of all doors or just the
driver's door.
For more information on Access, refer to the
corresponding section.
F activate or deactivate the automatic
operation of the electric parking brake**.
For more information on Driving, refer to the
corresponding section.
Lighting
With this menu selected, you can:
F activate or deactivate the operation of the
daytime running lamps**.
F activate or deactivate the guide-me-home
lighting and set its period of operation.
F activate or deactivate the directional
headlamps.
For more information on the Lighting
control stalk (in particular on the
daytime running lamps and automatic
guide-me-home lighting) or the
Directional lighting, refer to the
corresponding section.
1
Instruments
17
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption…).
In the instrument panel screen
Information displays
F Turn the left-hand thumb wheel A on the
steering wheel to display the various trip
computer tabs in succession:
Trip computer
- The current information tab is displayed in
zone B of the instrument panel screen, with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the digital speed reading or the Stop &
Start time counter.
- The trip "1" tab is displayed in zone C of
the instrument panel screen, with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- The trip "2" tab is displayed in zone C of
the instrument panel screen, with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
Trip reset
F When the trip required is displayed, press
the left-hand thumb wheel on the steering
wheel for more than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Instruments
18
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
In the touch screen tablet
Information display
F Press the MENU button.
- The current information tab with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the Stop & Start time counter.
- The trip "1" tab with:
● the average fuel consumption,
● the distance travelled,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- The trip "2" tab with:
● the average fuel consumption,
● the distance travelled,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
Trip reset
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
the reset button.
F Select "Driving" to display the
various tabs.
F Select the desired tab using your finger.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
1
Instruments
19
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
A few definitions…
Range
(miles or km)
The distance which can still be
travelled with the fuel remaining
in the tank (at the average fuel
consumption seen over the last
few miles (kilometres) travelled).
Current fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated over the last few seconds.
Average fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed.
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the
range is recalculated and is displayed if it
exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
Stop & Start time
counter
(minutes / seconds or hours /
minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with
Stop & Start, a time counter
calculates the time spent in
STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the
ignition is switched on with
the key.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
This value may vary following a change
in the style of driving or the relief,
resulting in a significant change in the
current fuel consumption.
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Instruments
20
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Return to the main
instrument panel screen
display
Successive rotations of the left-hand thumb
wheel on the steering wheel allow you to return
to the main instrument panel screen display
(vehicle speed), via the navigation information
screen, then the screen displaying only the
total mileage and the trip mileage (bottom of
screen).
You can display navigation information in
the instrument panel screen by rotating the
left-hand thumb wheel on the steering wheel.
This function allows you to check certain
indicators and display the log of alerts.
F Press on button A.
The following information appears in turn in the
instrument panel screen:
- Repeat of the service indicator.
- Repeat of the range indicator for the
AdBlue
®
and the SCR system for BlueHDi
Diesel versions.
- Repeat of the engine oil level indicator.
- Any alert messages.
Check functionDisplay of navigation
information in the
instrument panel screen
1
Instruments
21
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Engine oil temperature
gauge
Under normal operating conditions, the bars
should be within section 1.
In severe operating conditions, the bars may
extend into section 2.
In this event, slow down, and if necessary,
stop the engine and check the levels (see the
corresponding section).
Coolant temperature
gauge
Under normal operating conditions, the bars
should be within section 1.
In severe operating conditions, the bars may
extend into section 2, the engine coolant
temperature warning lamp A and the STOP
warning lamp come on in the instrument panel.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch off
the ignition. The cooling fan may continue to
operate for a certain time.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If the SERVICE warning lamp comes on, check
the levels (see the corresponding section).
On horizontal ground, illumination of the fuel
low warning lamp indicates that you are at the
reserve level.
An alert message is displayed in the instrument
panel.
Fuel gauge
Indicators
Instruments
22
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
More than 1 700 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service
is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information appears in the instrument panel
screen.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles
(3 000 km) remain before the next service is due
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner symbolising the service
operations comes on and a message is
displayed in the instrument panel indicating
the distance or time remaining before the next
service is due.
Example: 1 900 miles (2 800 km) remain
before the next service is due.
When the ignition is switched on, the
instrument panel screen temporarily indicates:
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner symbolising the service
operations flashes and a message is displayed
in the instrument panel indicating the distance or
time remaining before the next service is due.
Example: 500 miles (900 km) remain before the
next service is due.
When the ignition is switched on, the instrument
panel screen indicates for a few seconds:
After the message disappears, the spanner
remains on alongside the mileage recorder as
a reminder that a service must be carried out
soon.
Service indicator
System which informs the driver when the
next service is due, in accordance with the
manufacturer's service schedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last service indicator reset
to zero, according to the mileage covered and
the time elapsed since the last service.
A few seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner goes off.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, depending
on the country of sale, the degree of
deterioration of the engine oil may also
be taken into account.
1
Instruments
23
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Service indicator
zero reset
Service overdue
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner flashes to indicate that
the service must be carried out as soon as
possible.
Example: the service is overdue by 300 miles.
When the ignition is switched on, the
instrument panel screen indicates:
The spanner remains on alongside the
mileage recorder to indicate that a service is
overdue.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
spanner may also come on early,
according to the level of deterioration
of the engine oil, which depends on the
driving conditions in which the vehicle
is used.
After each service, the service indicator must
be reset to zero.
If you have carried out the service yourself:
F switch off the ignition,
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
zero reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to
disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and
wait at least five minutes for the zero reset to
be taken into account.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
Service warning lamp also comes on
when the ignition is switched on.
The spanner may come on if you have
exceeded the period since the last service,
as indicated in the manufacturer's service
schedule.
Instruments
24
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Engine oil level indicator
The engine oil level is displayed in the
instrument panel screen for a few seconds
when the ignition is switched on, after the
servicing information.
Oil level correct
This is indicated by the display of the message
"Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel
screen, accompanied by the service warning
lamp and an audible signal.
Oil level indicator fault
In the event of a fault with the electric
indicator, the oil level is no longer
monitored.
If the system is faulty, you must check
the engine oil level using the manual
dipstick located under the bonnet.
For more information on Checking
levels, refer to the corresponding
section.
Oil level incorrect
This is signalled by the display of the message
"Oil level measurement invalid" in the
instrument panel screen.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a
check using the dipstick, the level must
be topped-up to avoid damage to the
engine.
For more information on Checking
levels, refer to the corresponding
section.
The level read will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and the
engine has been off for more than
30 minutes.
1
Instruments
25
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Distance recorders Lighting dimmer
F Press button A to decrease the brightness
of the instruments and controls.
F Press button B to increase the brightness
of the instruments and controls.
Deactivation
When the lighting is off, or in day mode on
vehicles fitted with daytime running lamps,
pressing the buttons does not have any effect.
Total distance recorder
When travelling abroad, you may
have to change the units of distance:
the display of road speed must be in
the official units (miles or km) for the
country.
The change of units is done via the
screen configuration menu, with the
vehicle stationary.
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
System for manual adjustment of the
brightness of the instruments and controls in
relation to the exterior brightness.
Trip distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
Operation
It measures the distance travelled since it was
reset by the driver.
Resetting the trip recorder
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
Instruments
26
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning and indicator lamps
Visual indicators which inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction or fault (warning lamp)
or of the operation of a system (operation or deactivation indicator lamp).
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on.
When the engine is started, these warning
lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information for the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The illumination, fixed or flashing, of certain
warning lamps may be accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the screen.
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, the illumination of one of the
following warning lamps indicates a malfunction
or fault which requires action on the part of
the driver.
The illumination of a warning lamp is always
accompanied by the display of an additional
message, to assist you in identifying the fault.
If you encounter any problems, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
1
Instruments
27
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
STOP fixed, associated with
another warning lamp.
The illumination of this warning lamp
is associated with a serious fault with
the braking system, power steering,
automatic gearbox, engine oil
pressure, engine coolant temperature
or a major electrical fault.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and call a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Service temporarily,
accompanied by a
message.
One or more minor faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen.
You can deal with some problems yourself, such as a
door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter
(as soon as the traffic conditions allow, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph
(60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under inflation detection system, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, accompanied by
a message.
One or more major faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen; you must then contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with the
flashing and then fixed
display of the service
indicator spanner.
The servicing interval has been
exceeded.
Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
Instruments
28
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Braking fixed, associated with
the STOP warning
lamp.
The braking system fluid level is too
low.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by CITROËN.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with
the STOP and ABS
warning lamps.
The electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) system has a fault.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Anti-lock
Braking System
(ABS)
fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a
fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Electric parking
brake
flashing. The electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
The application/release is faulty.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park on flat level ground, engage a gear (or place the
lever in position P for an automatic gearbox), switch
off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking
brake fault
fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
For more information on the Electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
1
Instruments
29
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is
operating.
The system optimises traction and improves the
directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
grip or trajectory.
fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Brake pad wear fixed, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message in the
display screen.
The brake pads are at an advanced
state of wear.
Have the brake pads replaced by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions of the
electric parking
brake
fixed. The "automatic application" (on
switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" functions are
deactivated or faulty.
Activate the function (depending on the country of
sale) via the vehicle parameters menu or contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop if automatic
application / release is no longer possible.
For more information on the Electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels
is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed,
accompanied by the
Service warning lamp.
The tyre pressure monitoring system
has a fault or no sensor is detected
on one of the wheels.
Under-inflation detection is not assured.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Instruments
30
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Maximum
coolant
temperature
fixed. The temperature of the cooling
system is too high.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping-
up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or
qualified workshop.
Battery charge* fixed. The battery charging circuit has a
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or
cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
started.
If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
+
Seat belt not
fastened /
unfastened
fixed. The driver and/or the front/ rear
passenger has not fastened or has
unfastened their seat belt.
Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Seat belts
not fastened /
unfastened
fixed, associated
with the seat belt not
fastened / unfastened
warning lampl.
The illuminated dots represent the not fastened /
unfastened passengers.
They come on:
- fixed for 30 about seconds on starting the vehicle,
- fixed from 0 to 12 mph (0 to 20 km/h) when
driving,
- flashing above 12 mph (20 km/h), accompanied by
an audible signal for about 120 seconds.
* Depending on the country of sale.
1
Instruments
31
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
fixed. The emission control system has a
fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
flashing. The engine management system has
a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Low fuel
level
fixed. When it first comes on there remains
approximately 5 litres of fuel in the
tank.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running
out of fuel.
This warning lamp wil come on every time the ignition
is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is
made.
Fuel tank capacity: 71 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, this
could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
Instruments
32
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating the
remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is
between 350 miles (600 km) and
1500 miles (2400 km).
Have the AdBlue
®
tank topped-up as soon as
possible: go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
flashing, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message
indicating the
remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is
between 0 and 350 miles (600 km).
You must top-up the AdBlue
®
tank to avoid a
breakdown: go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
flashing, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message
indicating that starting
is prevented.
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the
starting inhibition system required
by legislation prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the
AdBlue
®
tank: go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue
®
to
the fluid tank.
For topping-up the AdBlue
®
fluid or for more information on AdBlue
®
, refer to the corresponding section.
1
Instruments
33
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
A fault with the SCR emissions
control system has been detected.
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
return to normal levels.
flashing, on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
After confirmation of the fault with the
emissions control system, you can
drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km)
before the engine starting inhibition
system is triggered.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
flashing, on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
You have exceeded the authorised
driving limit following confirmation
of a fault with the emissions control
system: the engine starting inhibition
system prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Instruments
34
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on
using the ring on the lighting control
stalk.
Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward
once to switch off the front foglamps.
Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps have been
switched on using the ring on the
lighting control stalk.
Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearwards to
switch off the rear foglamps.
Operation indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand
direction indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk has been pushed
down.
Right-hand
direction indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk has been pushed up.
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the
"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped
beam headlamps" position.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk has been pulled
towards you.
Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
Hazard warning
lamps
flashing with audible
signal.
The hazard warning lamps switch,
located on the dashboard, has been
operated.
The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and
their associated indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
It may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.
1
Instruments
35
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed. The ignition switch is at the
2nd position (ignition on).
Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.
The duration for which the warning lamp is on is determined
by the climatic conditions.
Parking brake fixed. The parking brake is applied. Release the parking brake to switch off the warning
lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For further information on the Manual parking
brake or the Electric parking brake, refer to the
corresponding section.
flashing. The parking brake is not fully applied
or is released.
Passenger's
front airbag
fixed. The control switch, located in the
glove box, is in the "ON" position.
The passenger's front airbag is
activated.
In this case, do not install a rearward
facing child seat.
Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to
deactivate the front passenger's airbag.
You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless
there is an airbag fault.
Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights,
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system
has put the engine into STOP mode.
The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
move off.
flashes for a few
seconds, then goes
off.
STOP mode is temporarily
unavailable,
or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
corresponding section.
Instruments
36
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Deactivation indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Passenger's
front airbag
fixed. The control, located in the glove box,
is set to the OFF position.
The passenger's front airbag is
deactivated.
You can install a rearward facing
child seat, unless there is a fault with
the operation of the airbags.
Set the control to the ON position to activate the
passenger's front airbag.
In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward
facing position.
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.
1
Instruments
37
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Monochrome screen C
Displays in the screen Controls
Displays according to context:
- time,
- date,
- exterior temperature with air conditioning
(the value displayed flashes if there is a
risk of ice),
- parking sensor information,
- audio functions,
- alert messages.
A. Access to the "Main Menu"
B. Cancel the operation or return to the
previous display
C. Scroll through the screen menus
Confirmation at the steering wheel
D. Confirmation at the audio system control
panel
Selection of the type of
information displayed (Mode)
Successive presses on the end of the
wiper stalk or on the MODE button of the
audio system permit selection of the type of
information presented in the multifunction
screen (date or audio system, CD, MP3).
For safety reasons, it is recommended
that the driver does not operate the
controls while the vehicle is in motion.
Instruments
38
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Main Menu
"Audio functions"
menu
With the Audio system switched on, once
this menu is selected, you can activate or
deactivate functions associated with using the
radio (RDS, REG, RadioText), CD (introscan,
random play, CD repeat) or MP3 player (USB
port / auxiliary Jack socket).
For more information on the Audio
system (and in particular the "Audio
functions" application), refer to the
corresponding section.
Press on the button A to view the "Main Menu"
of the multifunction screen. This menu gives
you access to the following functions:
- audio functions,
- display configuration,
- telephone (Bluetooth
®
hands-free kit).
With this menu selected, you have access to
the following settings:
- brightness - video,
- date and time,
- choice of units.
"Display
configuration" menu
With the Audio system switched on, once
this menu is selected, you can configure
your Bluetooth
®
hands-free kit (pairing), view
the different telephone directories (calls log,
services...) and manage your calls (start a call,
end a call, double call, secret mode...).
Adjusting the date and time
"Bluetooth - Telephone -
Audio" menu
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
For more information on the Audio
system, refer to the corresponding
section.
F Press on A.
F Use C to select the "Date and time" menu,
then confirm your choice with a press on C
on the steering wheel or D on the audio
system.
F Select the screen configuration using C.
Confirm with a press on C on the steering
wheel or D on the audio system
F Select the date and the time settings,
using B. Confirm with a press on C on the
steering wheel or D on the audio system.
F Press C to select the values you wish to
modify. Confirm your choice with a press
on C on the steering wheel or D on the
audio system.
F Confirm with "OK" on the screen.
1
Instruments
39
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Touch screen tablet
This system gives access to:
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
functions and systems,
- audio and display settings menus,
- audio system and telephone controls and
the display of associated information,
- the display of the exterior temperature (a
blue snowflake appears if there is a risk
of ice),
- the display of the trip computer.
And, depending on equipment, it also allows:
- the display of visual parking sensors
information,
- access to the controls for the navigation
system and Internet services, and the
display of associated information.
For safety reasons, the driver must
only carry out operations that
require close attention with the
vehicle stationary.
Some functions are not accessible
when driving.
After a few moments with no action on
the secondary page, the primary page
is displayed automatically.
General operation
Recommendations
It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for
"flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving
the map...). A light wipe is not enough.
The screen does not recognise pressing with
more than one finger.
This technology allows use at all temperatures
and when wearing gloves.
Principles
Press the MENU button, then the virtual
buttons in the touch screen tablet.
Each menu is displayed over one or two pages
(primary page and secondary page).
Use this button to go to the
secondary page.
Use this button to return to the
primary page.
Use this button for access to
additional information and to the
settings for certain functions.
Use this button to confirm.
Use this button to quit.
Do not use pointed objects on the touch
screen tablet.
Do not touch the touch screen tablet
with wet hands.
Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the
touch screen tablet.
Instruments
40
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Menus
Press this button on the control
panel, then the menu button
concerned.
Navigation
Depending on trim level or country of
sale, navigation may be unavailable,
optional or standard.
Radio Media
For more information on Audio
and telematics, refer to the
corresponding section.
Settings
Allows configuration of the display
and the system.
Internet
The connected services are
accessible using the Bluetooth
®
,
Wi-Fi or MirrorLink™ connections.
Telephone
For more information on Audio
and telematics, refer to the
corresponding section.
Driving
Gives access to the trip computer.
1. Volume / mute.
For more information on Audio and
telematics, refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Audio and
telematics, refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Audio and
telematics, refer to the corresponding section.
Depending on version, allows settings to be
adjusted for certain functions.
For more information on Driving, see the
corresponding section.
1
Instruments
41
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
"Driving" menu
The systems with settings that can be adjusted are detailed in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Vehicle settings Access to other functions with settings that can be adjusted. The functions are grouped together under
three tabs:
- "Driving assistance"
● "Parking sensors" (Audible and visual parking assistance).
For more information on the Parking sensors, refer to the corresponding section.
● "Automatic parking brake" (Automatic electric parking brake).
For more information on the Electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.
● "Automatic rear wiper in reverse" (Activation of rear wiper coupled to reverse gear).
For more information on the Wiper control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
- "Lighting"
● "Guide-me-home lighting" (Automatic guide-me-home lighting).
For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
● "Auto headlamp dip".
For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
● "LED daytime running lamps".
For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
- "Vehicle access"
● "Driver plip action" (Selective unlocking of the driver's door).
For more information on the Remote control, refer to the corresponding section.
● "Driver welcome" (Welcome function).
For more information on the Front seats, refer to the corresponding section.
Select or deselect the tabs at the bottom of the screen to display the functions required.
Instruments
42
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
"Settings" menu
The functions accessible in this menu are given in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Audio settings Adjustment of volume, balance...
Turn off screen Turns off the display in the touch screen tablet (black screen).
Pressing the black screen (or the MENU button) restores the display.
Time/Date Setting the date and time.
Screen settings Adjustment of the display settings (scrolling of text, animations...) and the screen brightness.
Calculator Display the calculator.
Calendar Display the calendar.
1
Instruments
43
C5_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Setting the date and time
F Select the "Settings" menu.
F In the secondary page, press on "Time/
Date".
F Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date". F Modify the settings using the number
keypad, then confirm.
F Press "Confirm" to save and quit.
When setting the time, you can select
"Satellite synchronisation", so that
the time is adjusted automatically by
satellite reception.
Acc ess
44
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Remote control key
System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to open the boot, locate and start
the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.
Unfolding / Folding the key
Complete unlocking using the
remote control
Unlocking the vehicle
F Press the open padlock to
unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using
the key
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
towards the front of the vehicle to unlock it.
Selective unlocking using the
remote control
F Press the open padlock once to
unlock the driver's door only.
Each unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing
of the direction indicators for approximately two
seconds and by switching on of the courtesy
lamp.
Depending on version, the exterior mirrors
unfold at the same time as the first unlocking
action.
The complete or selective unlocking is set via
the vehicle parameters menu.
For more information on the Instrument
panels (and in particular the "Vehicle
parameters" menu), refer to the corresponding
section.
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
F Press the open padlock again to unlock the
other doors and the boot.
Selective unlocking is not possible
using the key.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of
the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds and lighting of the courtesy lamp
(if the function is activated).
According to version, the door mirrors unfold at
the same time.
F
First press this button to unfold / fold the key.
2
Acc ess
45
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Normal locking using the key
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking using the remote
control
F Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle.
F Press the closed padlock for more than two
seconds to close the windows and sunroof
automatically in addition to locking.
If one of the doors, the rear screen or
the boot is still open, the central locking
does not take place.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is
unlocked inadvertently, it will lock
again automatically after thirty seconds
unless a door is opened.
When stationary with the engine off,
locking is confirmed by flashing of the
interior locking control indicator lamp.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
towards the rear to lock the vehicle.
Locking is confirmed by fixed illumination
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds and by the courtesy lamp
going off.
According to version, the door mirrors fold at
the same time.
Boot
F Press this button for more
than one second to unlock and
release the boot.
Manual boot
Motorised boot
F Press this button for more than
one second to unlock and and
trigger the automatic opening
of the boot.
Acc ess
46
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
to the rear of the vehicle to lock it and
hold it in this position for more than two
seconds to close the windows and sunroof
automatically in addition to locking.
F Turn the key to the rear of the vehicle within
five seconds to deadlock it.
Using the key
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Deadlocking
F Press the closed padlock
to lock the vehicle or press
the closed padlock for more
than two seconds to close
the windows and sunroof
automatically in addition to
locking.
F Press the closed padlock again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Using the remote control
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
According to version, the exterior mirrors fold at
the same time.
When stationary with the engine off,
locking is confirmed by flashing of the
indicator lamp on the interior locking
control.
If one of the doors or the boot is open
or has not been closed correctly, the
central locking will not work.
2
Acc ess
47
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Operating problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or in
the event of a remote control fault, you can no
longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle.
F Then, reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
Reinitialisation
F Switch off the ignition.
F Turn the key to position 2 (Igntion on).
(For more information on Starting-
switching off the engine, refer to the
corresponding section).
F Press the closed padlock immediately for a
few seconds, until the operation requested
is triggered.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR2032 / 3 volts.
F Unclip the casing using a small screwdriver
at the notch.
F Remove the cover.
F Remove the flat battery from its housing.
F Place the new battery into its housing
observing the original direction of fitment.
F Clip the cover into place.
Locating your vehicle
F Press the closed padlock to locate your
locked vehicle in a car park.
This is indicated by switching on of the interior
lighting and flashing of the direction indicators
for a few seconds.
The vehicle remains locked.
If the battery is flat, you are informed
by illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and a message in
the multifunction screen.
Acc ess
48
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Lost keys
Go to a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal
identification documents and if possible the key code label.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code
required to order a new key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your
pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have
to be reinitialised.
No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition
is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the
emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short
period.
In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could
cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a CITROËN dealer, to
ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
2
Acc ess
49
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Alarm*
- exterior perimeter
The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
door, the boot, the bonnet...
- interior volumetric
The system checks for any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window, enters the passenger compartment or
moves inside the vehicle.
- tilt
The system checks for any change in the
attitude of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted,
moved or knocked.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Activation
* Depending on the country of sale.
Self-protection function
The system checks for the putting out of
service of its components.
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the
central control or the siren wiring are
put out of service or damaged.
For all work on the alarm system,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
System which protects and provides a deterrent
against theft and break-ins. It provides the
following types of monitoring:
F
Switch off the ignition and get out of the
vehicle.
F
Press the locking button on the remote control.
The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp
in the button flashes once per second.
After the locking button on the remote control
is pressed, the exterior perimeter monitoring is
activated after a delay of 5 seconds and the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after a delay of
45 seconds.
If an opening (door, boot...) is not closed fully, the
vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter
monitoring will be activated after a delay of
45 seconds at the same time as the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.
Acc ess
50
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Deactivation
F Press the unlocking button on the remote
control.
The alarm system is deactivated: the indicator
lamp in the button goes off.
Locking the vehicle
with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the
alarm in certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
- leaving a window partially open,
- washing your vehicle,
- changing a wheel,
- having your vehicle towed,
- transport by sea.
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring
F Switch off the ignition.
F Within ten seconds, press the button until
the indicator lamp is on continuously.
F Get out of the vehicle.
F Press the locking button on the remote
control immediately.
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
activated: the indicator lamp in the button
flashes once per second.
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring
F Press the unlocking button on the remote
control to deactivate the exterior perimeter
monitoring.
F Press the locking button on the remote
control to activate all the monitoring
functions.
The indicator lamp in the button again flashes
once per second.
To be effective, this deactivation must
be carried out each time the ignition is
switched off.
2
Acc ess
51
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and
flashing of the direction indicators for thirty
seconds.
The monitoring functions remain active until
the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
in the button informs you that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When the
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
immediately.
Failure of the remote control
F unlock the vehicle using the key in the
driver's door lock,
F open the door; the alarm is triggered,
F switch on the ignition; the alarm stops;
the indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock.
Operating fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed
illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
indicates a fault with the system.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Automatic activation*
2 minutes after closing the last door or the
boot, the system is activated automatically.
F To avoid triggering the alarm when entering
the vehicle, first press the remote control
unlocking button.
* Depending on the country of sale.
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
Acc ess
52
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Electric windows
1. Driver's electric window control.
2. Passenger's electric window control.
3. Rear right electric window control.
4. Rear left electric window control.
5. Deactivation of the rear electric window
and door controls.
One-touch electric windows
- automatic mode
F Press or pull the control firmly, beyond
the point of resistance. The window
opens or closes fully when the control is
released.
F Pressing the control again stops the
movement of the window.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and partially lowers again.
The electric window controls remain
operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off or until the vehicle is locked after a
door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows cannot
be operated from the driver's door
control panel, carry out the operation
from the control panel of the passenger
door concerned, and vice versa.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
F press and hold the control until the
window opens fully,
F then pull the control immediately
and hold it until the window closes,
F continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
There are two options:
- manual mode
F Press or pull the control gently, without
passing the point of resistance. The
window stops when the control is
released.
2
Acc ess
53
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically, its
operation must be reinitialised:
F pull the control until the window stops,
F release the control and pull it again until
the window closes fully,
F continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the window
has closed,
F press the control to lower the window
automatically to the low position,
F when the window has reached the low
position, press the control again for
approximately one second.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Deactivation of the rear
electric window and door
controls
F For the safety of your children, press
control 5 to deactivate the rear electric
window controls regardless of their
position.
Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are
deactivated.
Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are
activated.
A message in the instrument panel screen
informs you of the activation / deactivation of
the control.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows, you
must reverse the movement of the
window. To do this, press the control
concerned.
When the driver operates the controls
for the passengers' electric windows,
they must ensure that no-one is
preventing correct closing of the
windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
This control also deactivates the interior
controls for the rear doors.
For more information on the Child lock, refer
to the corresponding section.
Any other status of the indicator lamp
indicates a fault with the electric child
lock.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Acc ess
54
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Doors
Opening
From inside
Manual central locking
Locking
F Press button A to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button comes
on. It flashes when the doors are locked while
stationary with the engine off.
From outside
When the selective unlocking is
activated, the first press of the remote
control unlocking button permits
unlocking of the driver's door only.
With the selective unlocking activated:
- the driver's door control unlocks the
driver's door only,
- the other door controls unlock the
other doors and the boot.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.
If one of the doors is open, the central
locking from the inside does not take
place.
System which provides full manual locking or
unlocking of the doors and boot from the inside.
F After unlocking the vehicle completely
using the remote control or the key, pull the
door handle.
F Pull the interior control lever of a front door;
this unlocks the vehicle completely.
2
Acc ess
55
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Unlocking
F Press button A again to unlock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
switches off.
Automatic central locking
Locking
When the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the
doors and the boot lock automatically.
If one of the doors is open, the automatic
central locking does not take place.
If the boot is open, the automatic central
locking of the doors is active.
Unlocking
F Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press button A to
unlock the doors and the boot temporarily.
Activation
F Press button A for more than two seconds.
A confirmation message appears on the
instrument panel screen, accompanied by an
audible signal.
Deactivation
F Press button A again for more than
two seconds.
A confirmation message appears on the
instrument panel screen, accompanied by an
audible signal.
If the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
from the outside, the red indicator lamp
flashes and button A is inactive.
F In this case, use the remote control
or the key to unlock the vehicle.
System which provides full automatic locking
or unlocking of the doors and the boot while
driving.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
Acc ess
56
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
System allowing the doors to be locked and
unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction
of the central locking system or battery failure.
Locking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the rear.
You can also apply the procedure described for
the passenger doors.
Unlocking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the front.
Locking the passenger doors
F Open the doors.
F On the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on.
For more information on the Child lock, refer
to the corresponding section.
F Remove the black cap, located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
F Insert the key in the socket without forcing
it, then without turning it, move the latch
sideways towards the inside of the door.
F Remove the key and refit the cap.
F Close the doors and check that the vehicle
has locked correctly from the outside.
Unlocking the passenger doors
F Pull the interior door opening control.
Back-up control
2
Acc ess
57
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Boot (Saloon)
F Press upwards on lever 1 and lift up the
boot lid.
With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out
using:
- The remote control.
- The key in a door lock.
- The interior central locking/ unlocking control.
The boot automatically locks when the vehicle
is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h),
even if automatic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened or when
the central locking button is pressed (speed
lower than 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Opening Locking/unlocking Emergency boot release
Unlocking
F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
the lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the tailgate.
F Push the white part, located inside the
lock, to the left to unlock the boot.
System for mechanical unlocking of the boot
in the event of a battery or central locking
malfunction.
Acc ess
58
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Motorised opening
Boot (Tourer)
Manual opening
F Press upwards on lever A and lift up the
tailgate.
F Press upwards on lever A, or press of more
than one second on button B of the remote
control.
Manual closing
F Lower the tailgate using the interior
handle C.
Motorised closing
F Press the push-button D to close the
tailgate.
Do not interrupt the closing of the tailgate;
if any obstacle prevents it closing, the
operation will stop and the tailgate will
automatically rise by a few centimetres.
Do not attempt to help the opening of
the tailgate manually after pressing the
control A.
2
Acc ess
59
C5_en_Chap02_ouverture_ed01-2016
Cancelling the
memorisation
With the tailgate in the intermediate position,
you can cancel the stored position:
F Make a long press on push-button D.
The system emits a long audible beep.
F Release the push-button D. The tailgate
will return to the fully open position at the
next use.
Electrical protection of the
motor
If the tailgate is repeatedly opened and closed
in quick succession, the motor can start to
overheat and then cut out, preventing opening
and closing of the tailgate.
Allow the motor to cool down for ten minutes
without opening or closing the tailgate.
Closing in manual back-up mode remains
possible.
To avoid risk of injury, make sure that
no one is in the vicinity of the boot while
opening and closing.
If the tailgate is carrying extra weight
(snow, bicycle carrier, etc.) there is a
risk of it closing under this load. Support
the tailgate or first unload the bicycle
carrier or clear the snow.
When using an automatic car wash,
don’t forget to lock the vehicle so as to
avoid any risk of motorised opening of
the tailgate.
Memorisation of an
intermediate position
You can store an opening angle for the tailgate:
F Manually or automatically move the tailgate
to the required position.
F Make a long press on push-button D.
The system emits a short audible beep.
F Release the push-button D.
Interrupting the opening /
closing of the tailgate
When the tailgate is being opened or closed
electrically, you can interrupt its movement
at any point by pressing push-button D, the
control A or button B.
You can then open or close the tailgate
electrically or manually, if necessary moving it
in the opposite direction to release it.
Locking/unlocking
With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out
using:
- The remote control.
- The key in a door lock.
- The interior central locking/ unlocking
control.
The boot automatically locks when the vehicle
is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h),
even if automatic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened or when
the central locking button is pressed (at a
speed of less than 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Ease of use and comfort
60
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Front seats
Manual adjustments
1. Adjustments to the height and angle of
the head restraint
To raise it, pull upwards.
To lower it, press on the release button A
and simultaneously on the head restraint
itself. The adjustment is correct when the
top edge of the head restraint is at the
same height as the top of the head. It is
also tilt adjustable.
To remove it, press the release button A,
then pull it upwards. It may be necessary to
adjust the backrest angle.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle
Operate the control and adjust the position
of the backrest to the front or to the rear.
3. Adjustment of the seat height
Raise or lower the control the number
of times required to obtain the desired
position.
4. Longitudinal adjustment of seat
Lift the control bar and adjust to the desired
position.
5. Adjustment of lumbar support
Turn the control and adjust to the desired
position.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, seat back and head restraint which can all be adjusted for optimum driving comfort.
For your safety, do not drive with the
head restraints removed; they must be
in place and correctly adjusted.
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
passengers if present in the rear seats
or jamming the seat if large objects are
placed on the floor behind the seat.
6. Heated seat controls
The heated seats only operate when the
engine is running.
3
Ease of use and comfort
61
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Electric adjustments
To adjust the electric seats, switch on the
ignition or start the engine if the vehicle has
gone into economy mode.
Seat adjustments are also possible for a short
period after opening one of the front doors or
switching off the ignition.
1. Adjustment of the seat height and
angle, and longitudinal position
Raise or lower the front of the control to
adjust the seat cushion angle.
Raise or lower the rear of the control to
raise or lower the seat.
Slide the control forwards or backwards to
move the seat forward or back.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle
Move the control forwards or backwards to
adjust the backrest angle.
3. Adjustment of the angle of the top of
the backrest
Move the control forwards or backwards to
adjust the angle of the top of the backrest.
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
passengers if present in the rear seats
or jamming the seat if large objects are
placed on the floor behind the seat.
Move the control:
- Forwards or backwards to increase or
reduce the lumbar support.
- Upwards or downwards to raise or lower
the lumbar support zone.
4. Adjustment of lumbar support
This function allows you to independently
adjust the height and level of lumbar
support.
Ease of use and comfort
62
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Head restraint height and angle
adjustments
(electric seats)
F To adjust the angle of the head restraint,
push back or pull forward section B of the
head restraint until you reach the desired
position.
F To raise it, pull upwards.
F To lower it, press on the control C to
release it, and simultaneously on the head
restraint itself.
F To remove it, press on the control C to
release it, then pull it upwards.
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats can
operate separately.
F Use the corresponding adjustment dial,
placed on the outer side of each front seat,
to switch on and select the level of heating
required:
0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.
Do not use the function if the seat is not
occupied.
Reduce the level of heating as soon as
possible.
Once the seat and passenger
compartment are at a comfortable
temperature, you can switch off the
function; reducing electric current
consumption also reduces fuel
consumption.
Prolonged use at the highest setting
is not recommended for those with
sensitive skin.
There is a risk of burns for those that
do not have normal perception of heat
(illness, taking medicines, ...).
There is a risk of overheating the
system if material with insulating
properties is used, such as cushions or
seat covers.
Do not use the system:
- if wearing damp clothing,
- if child seats are fitted.
To avoid breaking the heating element
in the seat:
- do not place heavy objects on the
seat,
- do not kneel or stand on the seat,
- do not place sharp objects on the
seat,
- do not spill liquids onto the seat.
To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
- do not use liquid products for
cleaning the seat,
- never use the heating function
when the seat is damp.
3
Ease of use and comfort
63
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Welcome function
The welcome function assists entry and exit
from the vehicle.
After switching off the ignition and opening
the driver’s door, the driver's seat moves back
automatically and then stays in this position,
ready for the next entry to the vehicle.
When switching on the ignition, the seat moves
forward to the memorised driving position.
When moving the seat, take care that no
person or object hinders the automatic
movement of the seat.
This function is deactivated by default.
You can activate or deactivate this function in
the vehicle parameters menu.
This function provides the driver with a back
massage. It only operates when the engine is
running.
F Press on button A.
The warning lamp comes on and the massage
function is activated for a period of 1 hour.
During this time, massage is performed in
cycles of 6 minutes (4 minutes of massage
followed by 2 minutes break). In total, the
system will perform 10 cycles.
After 1 hour, the function is deactivated.
The warning lamp goes out.
Massage function
Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage function at
any time by pressing on button A.
Ease of use and comfort
64
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Storing driving positions
System which stores the settings of the driver's
seat. It allows two positions to be stored.
Use the buttons located on the door, driver's
side.
When storing a driving position, the air
conditioning settings are also memorised.
Storing a position
Using buttons M / 1 / 2
F Switch on the ignition.
F Adjust your seat.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2
within four seconds.
An audible signal confirms that the settings
have been stored.
Storing a new position cancels the previous
position.
For more information on Dual-zone
automatic air conditioning, refer to
the corresponding section.
For your safety, avoid storing a driving
position while driving.
Recalling a stored position
Ignition on or engine running
F Briefly press button 1 or 2 to recall the
corresponding position.
An audible signal indicates the end of the
adjustment.
When the ignition is on, after a few consecutive
position recalls, the function will be deactivated
until the engine is started, to prevent
discharging of the battery.
3
Ease of use and comfort
65
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Steering wheel adjustment
F First, adjust the driver's seat to the most
suitable position.
F When stationary, lower the lever A to
release the steering wheel adjustment.
F Adjust for height and reach.
F Raise the lever to lock the steering wheel
adjustment.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and reach to adapt the driving position to the size of
the driver.
Adjustment
As a safety precaution, these
operations must only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
After locking, if you press firmly on the
steering wheel, a slight click may be
heard.
Ease of use and comfort
66
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
providing the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking. They can also be
folded.
Adjustment
With the ignition on:
F move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror,
F move control B in all four directions to
adjust,
F return control A to the central position.
Folding
F From outside; lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
F From inside; with the ignition on, pull
control A rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using control A, they
will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked.
Control A must be pulled again.
Unfolding
F From outside; unlock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
F From inside; with the ignition on, pull
control A rearwards.
If the position is changed manually, a long
press on control A re-engages the mirror.
Door mirrors
The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind.
As a safety measure, the mirrors must
be adjusted to reduce the blind spot.
Demisting / defrosting of the door
mirrors is associated with that of
the rear screen.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Demisting / Defrosting
For more information on Mono-zone
digital air conditioning or Dual-zone
digital air conditioning (and in particular
"Rear Demisting - Defrosting"), refer to the
corresponding section.
3
Ease of use and comfort
67
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Electrochrome (automatic day/
night) model
In order to guarantee optimum visibility
during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens
automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
Using a sensor which measures the light
from the rear of the vehicle, this system
automatically and progressively changes
between day and night usage.
It has an anti-dazzle system which darkens the
mirror glass: this reduces any driver discomfort
caused by the light beam of following vehicles,
the sun...
In vehicles fitted with electrochrome door
mirrors, the system has an on/off button and an
associated warning lamp.
On
F With the ignition on, press on button 1.
The warning lamp 2 comes on and the mirror
glass is in automatic mode.
Off
F Press on button 1.
The warning lamp 2 goes off and the mirror
glass remains in its lightest definition.
Rear view mirror
Manual model
Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day / night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to
the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
Ease of use and comfort
68
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Rear head restraints
The rear head restraints can be removed and
have two positions:
- high, position for use,
- low, storage position.
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower it, press the lug then the head
restraint.
To remove it, place it in the high position, push
the lug and pull it upwards.
To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the
holes taking care to remain in line with the seat
back.
Rear seats
Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) or right-hand (1/3) section of which can be folded to adapt the boot load space.
In order to fold a rear seat without any risk of
damage, always start with the seat cushion,
never with the seat backrest:
F Move the corresponding front seat forward
if necessary.
F Raise the front of the seat cushion 1.
F Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against the front
seat.
F Check that the seat belt is positioned
correctly on the side of the seat backrest.
F Lower or remove the head restraints if
necessary.
Folding the seat
F Pull the control 2 forward to release the
seat backrest 3.
F Fold the seat backrest 3 fully down.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed, they must be in place and
correctly adjusted.
The seat cushion 1 can be removed to
increase the load volume.
3
Ease of use and comfort
69
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Removing the seat cushion
Returning the seat backrest to
its original position
F
Put the seat backrest 3 into the fully upright
position and secure it.
F
Return the seat cushion 1 to its original position.
F
Refit the head restraints or put them back in place.
When returning the rear seat to its
original position, take care not to trap
the seat belts and ensure that their
buckles are positioned correctly.
F Move the corresponding front seat forward
if necessary.
F Raise the front of the seat cushion 1.
F Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against the front
seat.
Refitting the seat cushion
F Position the seat cushion 1 vertically.
F Insert one of the fixing brackets 2 into one
of the seat cushion supports. Carry out the
same operation for the other side keeping it
firmly towards the middle.
F Fully fold down the seat cushion 1.
F Press on the seat cushion to secure it.
The red indicator on the control 2 should
no longer be visible; if it is, push the seat
backrest 3 fully back.
F
Extract the fixing brackets 2 from the seat
cushion support by keeping it firmly towards the
middle. Carry out the same operation for the
other side.
F
Remove the seat cushion 1 by pulling upwards.
Ease of use and comfort
70
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Ventilation
A. Sunshine sensor.
B. Soft air diffusion grille.
The soft air diffusion grille located in the
centre of the dashboard provides optimum
distribution of the air for the front seats.
This system eliminates unpleasant air
currents while maintaining an optimum
temperature in the passenger compartment.
To open the soft air diffusion grille, turn the
wheel upwards.
To close the soft air diffusion grille, turn the
wheel fully downwards.
In very hot weather, to obtain more
satisfactory central and side ventilation, it
is advisable to close the diffused air grille.
C. Cooled glove box.
D. Rear passenger vents.
3
Ease of use and comfort
71
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance
guidelines below:
F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well
as the air extractor located in the boot.
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation
of the air conditioning system.
F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month
to keep it in perfect working order.
F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter
elements replaced regularly.
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its
special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to
have it checked regularly as recommended in the maintenance and warranty guide.
F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the
air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
Stop & Start
The heating and air conditioning
systems only work when the engine is
running.
To maintain a comfortable temperature
in the passenger compartment, you can
temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
system.
For more information on Stop & Start,
refer to the corresponding section.
The condensation created by the air
conditioning results in a discharge
of water under the vehicle which is
perfectly normal.
If after an extended stop in sunshine,
the interior temperature is very
high, first ventilate the passenger
compartment for a few moments.
Put the air flow control at a setting high
enough to quickly change the air in the
passenger compartment.
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gas R134A.
From 1st October 2016, depending on version and country of sale, contains fluorinated
greenhouse gas R134A (gas capacity 0.525 kg +/- 0.025 kg, GWP index 1 430, 0.751 t
equivalent CO
2
).
The air conditioning system does not
contain chlorine and does not present
any danger to the ozone layer.
Ease of use and comfort
72
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Digital air conditioning (dual-zone)
The air conditioning system operates with the engine running.
Dual-zone: this is the independent regulation of the temperature and air distribution on the driver's
side and the front passenger's side.
The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature and the air distribution to suit their
requirements.
The symbols and messages associated with the digital air conditioning controls appear in the
display screen.
This is the normal system
operating mode. In accordance
with the level of comfort chosen,
pressing this control, confirmed
by illumination of indicator
lamp A, permits automatic and
simultaneous control of all of the
following functions:
1a-1b. Automatic operation
1a. Automatic operation on the driver's side
1b. Automatic operation on the passenger's
side
2a. Temperature adjustment on the driver's
side
2b. Temperature adjustment on the
passenger's side
3a. Air distribution adjustment on the driver's
side
3b. Air distribution adjustment on the
passenger's side
4a. Driver's zone screen
4b. Passenger's zone screen
5. Air flow adjustment
6. Air conditioning On / Off
7. Recirculation of interior air
8. Rear demisting / defrosting
9. Front demisting / defrosting
- Air flow.
- Temperature in the passenger
compartment.
- Air distribution.
- Air conditioning.
- Automatic air recirculation.
It is advisable to leave all of the vents open.
Simply pressing one of the controls, with the
exception of temperature regulation 2a and 2b,
switches the system to manual mode. Indicator
lamp A goes off.
3
Ease of use and comfort
73
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
2a-2b. Temperature adjustment
Control via the manual controls
3a-3b. Air distribution
adjustment
F Press control 3b to change the distribution
of the air flow on the passenger's side.
The indicator lamps corresponding to the
distribution chosen come on:
- Windscreen and front side windows.
- Front ventilation (central and side vents
and air diffusion grille if open) and rear
ventilation.
- Front and rear footwells.
F Turn control 2a to change the temperature
on the driver's side and control 2b
to change the temperature on the
passenger's side: to the right to increase or
to the left to reduce it.
The setting required is displayed.
The value indicated on the display corresponds
to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in
degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on
the screen configuration.
A setting around the value 21 usually provides
optimum comfort. However, depending on your
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
normal.
F Press control 3a
to change the
distribution of the
air flow on the
driver's side.
F Press one of the controls, with the
exception of temperature regulation 2a and
2b. The indicator lamps A in the "AUTO"
controls go off.
It is possible to adjust one or more functions
manually while leaving the other functions in
automatic mode.
Switching to manual mode may result in
discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour,
condensation) and may not provide optimum
comfort.
To return to "AUTO" mode, press controls 1a
and 1b. The indicator lamps A come on.
On entering the vehicle, the interior
temperature may be much colder
(or warmer) than is comfortable. There
is no need to change the temperature
displayed in order to quickly obtain the
level of comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air
conditioning will use its maximum
performance settings to correct the
temperature difference as quickly as
possible.
Simultaneous display of the
distribution of air to the windscreen
and side windows and of front and rear
ventilation is not possible.
Ease of use and comfort
74
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
5. Air ow adjustment
Reducing the air flow to minimum switches
the air conditioning system OFF.
To prevent condensation and deterioration
of the quality of the air in the passenger
compartment, ensure that an adequate flow of
air is maintained.
6. Air conditioning
The air conditioning will only
operate when the engine is running.
The air blower control (air flow
adjustment) must be active in order
to obtain air conditioning.
7. Recirculation of interior air
F Press control 7 once to
activate recycling of the
interior air.
This function permits recirculation
of the air and isolation of the
passenger compartment from
exterior fumes and odours.
F Press button 7 again
to activate automatic
recirculation with pollution
detection.
F Press control 7 a third time
to return to the standard
automatic mode (without
pollution detection).
Using a pollution sensor, the system
automatically activates recirculation of the
interior air once it detects a certain level of
pollutants in the interior air.
When the air quality returns to a satisfactory
level, the recirculation of interior air is
automatically deactivated.
F Press the control:
- to increase the air flow,
- to reduce the air flow.
The air flow level is indicated by the
progressive illumination of the fan
blade indicator lamps.
Avoid prolonged use of air
recirculation - Risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality!
You can store the settings of the air
conditioning system.
For more information on the Front
seats (and in particular storing driving
positions), refer to the corresponding
section.
F Press control 6. The indicator lamp comes
on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning
must be used with the windows closed.
Recirculation of the interior air is automatically
activated when engaging reverse or if the
screenwash is used.
The system is inactive when the ambient
temperature is below +5 °C to avoid the risk of
formation of mist on the windscreen and side
windows.
This system is not designed to detect
unpleasant odours.
The system is inactive when the exterior
temperature is below +5 °C to avoid the risk of
formation of mist on the windscreen and side
windows.
3
Ease of use and comfort
75
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
9. Front demisting / defrosting
In certain cases, the "AUTO"
mode may not be sufficient to
demist or defrost the windows
(humidity, several passengers,
ice).
8. Rear demisting / defrosting
The heated rear screen operates
independently of the air
conditioning system.
F Press control 8, with the engine running, to
demist the rear screen and the mirrors. The
indicator lamp comes on.
Demisting is switched off automatically to
avoid excessive consumption of current and
depending on the exterior temperature.
It may be stopped by pressing control 8 again
or when the engine is switched off.
In this latter case, the demisting resumes if the
engine is switched on again within one minute.
F Press control 9 to clear the windows
quickly. The indicator lamp comes on.
This system controls the temperature, air flow
and intake and distributes the ventilation to the
windscreen and front side windows.
Resuming manual control exits from the
"Demisting" mode. It must be cancelled as
soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in
the passenger compartment and demisting.
Pressing one of the controls 1a or 1b returns
the system to the "AUTO" mode.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
When starting with the engine cold,
air flow will reach its optimum level
gradually to prevent an excessive
distribution of cold air.
When entering the vehicle after it has
been parked for a fairly long period, if
the interior temperature is very different
from your comfort setting there is
no need to change the temperature
displayed in order to quickly reach the
level of comfort required. The system
automatically uses its maximum
performance to correct the difference in
temperature as quickly as possible.
The water resulting from the air
conditioning condensation is
discharged via an opening provided
for this purpose; therefore, a puddle of
water may form underneath the vehicle
when stationary.
In all seasons, if the weather is cool,
the air conditioning is useful as it
removes the humidity from the air
and the condensation. Avoid driving
for prolonged periods with the air
conditioning switched off.
Switch off the rear screen and
exterior mirrors demisting when you
consider this necessary, as low current
consumption reduces fuel consumption.
Ease of use and comfort
76
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
Panoramic sunroof rear
reading lamps (Tourer)
With the key in position or with the ignition on:
F Press the corresponding switch 1.
The reading lamp concerned comes on for
ten minutes.
The rear reading lamps come on:
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when the vehicle is unlocked.
They switch off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on.
Courtesy lamps
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
Front courtesy lamp
Rear courtesy lamp
1. Rear courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
Lighting off.
Lighting on.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door is opened,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
In lighting on mode, different lighting
times are available:
- with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
3
Ease of use and comfort
77
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Interior mood lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with interior mood lighting for the centre console and the door handles.
Central console Lighting for door opening
controls
Operation
These lamps are activated with the automatic
illumination of headlamps, when the ambient
light is poor. They are deactivated when the
instrument panel is off.
The intensity of the lighting varies along with
that of the instrument panel.
F Press buttons A to increase or reduce the
intensity of the lighting.
This is located on the front and rear interior
door opening controls.
The rear door opening controls lighting is
deactivated if the child lock is on.
The lamps are located on the roof console,
near the front interior lamp. They illuminate the
central console.
Ease of use and comfort
78
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Pavement lighting
With the door open, this illuminates the ground
next to the vehicle.
Floor lighting
In the front of the vehicle, when a door
is opened, this illuminates the interior of
the vehicle.
The welcome lighting is made up of:
- The interior (roof) lamps.
- The floor lighting.
- The pavement lighting when a door is open.
Welcome lighting
3
Ease of use and comfort
79
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Panoramic sunroof (Tourer)
This comprises a tinted glass panoramic
area 1 to improve brightness and vision in the
passenger compartment.
It is fitted with an electric blind 2 to help
maintain a comfortable temperature and
reduce noise.
Opening
F Press control A.
Pressing to the 1st notch allows you to open
the blind step by step.
Pressing to the 2nd notch allows you to fully
open the blind.
The blind stops in the closest pre-defined
position (11 positions) as soon as you release
the control.
Closing
F Press control B.
Press to the first notch to close the blind step
by step.
Press to the second notch to close the blind
completely.
The blind stops at the nearest pre-set position
(11 positions) as soon as you release the
control.
Sequential electric blind
Ease of use and comfort
80
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Anti-pinch
If the blind meets an obstacle whilst closing, it
stops and opens partially again.
You must re-initialise the anti-pinch function
within 5 seconds of the blind stopping:
F press control B until the blind is fully closed
(closing in steps of a few centimetres).
After a battery disconnection, or if there has
been a malfunction, you have to re-initialise the
anti-pinch function:
F press control B to the 2nd notch (fully
closed),
F wait until the blind is fully closed,
F press control B for at least 3 seconds.
If the blind opens randomly during a closing
operation, and straight after the blind stops:
F Press control B until the blind closes fully.
During these operations, the anti-pinch
function does not operate.
In the event of anything being caught
when the blind is moving, you must
reverse the movement of the blind.
To do so, reverse the position of the
control.
When the driver is operating the blind,
he or she must always make sure that
the passengers are not preventing it
from closing properly.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the blind correctly.
Pay particular attention to children
when operating the blind.
3
Ease of use and comfort
81
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Sun visor
F With the ignition on, lift the flap; the mirror
is illuminated automatically.
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold the visor
downwards.
It can be disengaged from its central fixing and
pivoted over to the side windows if required.
Cooled glove box
F To open the glove box, pull the handle and
lower the lid.
It has automatic illumination.
The glove box has an air vent A that can be
closed manually.
It provides access to the passenger's front
airbag deactivation switch B.
The glove box should be kept closed
when driving.
Front ttings
F Pull the grip towards you to open it.
Driver's storage compartment
Ease of use and comfort
82
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Mats
Removing
F Slide the front seat back as far as possible.
F Unclip the fixings.
F Remove the fixings, then the mat.
Retting
F Position the mat correctly.
F Clip the fixings.
F Check that the mat is held is place
correctly.
F Return the front seat to its original position.
Mats are provided for the driver and front
passenger.
To avoid any interference with the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suitable
for the fixings already present in the
vehicle; the use of these fixings is
essential,
- never fit more than 1 mat.
The use of a mat not approved by
CITROËN may obstruct access to the
pedals and hinder the cruise control/
speed limiter function.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
are fitted with a third fixing located
in the pedal area to avoid any risk of
interference with the pedals.
3
Ease of use and comfort
83
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Front armrest
Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.
Adjustment
To optimise your driving position:
F lift the control A,
F push the armrest forwards.
The armrest returns to its initial position when
you push it rearwards.
USB port
The USB port allows the connection of a
portable device, such as a digital player of the
iPod
®
type or a USB memory stick.
The USB player reads your audio files, which
are sent to the audio system so that they can
be heard via the vehicle's speakers.
Compartment
The front armrest includes a cup holder and a
USB port and/or auxiliary JACK socket*.
F Lift the armrest for access to the cup
holder, USB port and/or auxiliary JACK
socket.
* Depending on equipment.
When connected to the USB port,
the portable device is recharged
automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed
if the power consumption of the
portable device exceeds the rating of
the vehicle's port.
Auxiliary Jack socket
The auxiliary Jack socket allows the connection
of a portable device, such as a digital player,
so that your audio files can be heard via the
vehicle's speakers.
The management of these files is from your
portable device.
For more information on "Audio and
telematics", refer to the corresponding
section.
The USB also allows a telephone to be
connected by a MirrorLink™ connection, so
that use can be made in the touch screen tablet
of certain applications on the telephone.
The management of these files is with the
steering mounted controls or from the audio
system.
Ease of use and comfort
84
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Rear armrest
Comfort and storage system for the rear passengers.
Cup-holder
The rear cup-holder A is located in the rear
central armrest.
F Lower the rear armrest.
F Pull forwards to extract the cup-holder.
Storage
F Lift up the upper part of the rear central
armrest to access storage space B.
12 V accessory socket
This is located in the rear ashtray.
Max power: 100 W.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as a
USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor telephone
reception or interference with displays
in the screens.
Rear ttings
3
Ease of use and comfort
85
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Side blinds
F Pull the tab A to unreel the blind.
F Position the blind on the hook B.
Rear blind (Saloon)
F Pull the tab C to unreel the blind.
F Position the blind on the hooks D.
Ski flap
A flap in the backrest, located to the rear of the
armrest, facilitates the carrying of long objects.
To open
F Lower the rear armrest.
F Pull the flap handle down.
F Lower the flap.
F Load the objects from inside the boot.
Ensure that the objects are well secured
and that they do not impede the
operation of the gear lever.
Ease of use and comfort
86
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Boot ttings (Saloon)
1. Boot floor
(storage for the spare wheel and the tools)
2. Boot lamp
3. Open storage or Closed storage well
For vehicles so equipped, this is the
location for the Hi-Fi amplifier.
Luggage securing rings
F Use the 4 securing rings on the boot floor
to secure your luggage.
For safety reasons in the event of sharp
braking, you are advised to place heavy
objects as far forward in the boot as
possible.
3
Ease of use and comfort
87
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Boot ttings (Tourer)
1. Hook
For shopping bags.
2. Torch
To recharge, return it to its housing.
3. Storage net
1. Luggage cover
(see details on following page)
2. Luggage securing rings
Use the 4 securing rings provided on the
boot floor to secure your loads.
1. Boot lamp
2. 12 V accessory socket (100 W maximum)
Cigarette lighter type 12 volt socket. It is
located on the rear right-hand trim.
3. Loading height control
You can change the height of the vehicle to
make loading or unloading the boot easier.
4. Hook
For shopping bags.
5. Storage net or Closed storage well
For vehicles so equipped, this is the
location for the Hi-Fi amplifier.
As a safety measure in the event of
sharp braking, you are advised to
place heavy objects as far forwards as
possible.
3. Hooks
These allow a high load net to be fitted
(see details on following page).
Ease of use and comfort
88
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Luggage cover (Tourer)
To reel in
F Press the handle (PRESS) gently. The
luggage cover reels in automatically.
The moving part A can be folded along the rear
bench seat backrest.
To remove
F Compress the control 1 and lift the luggage
cover on the right then on the left to
remove it.
To install
F Position the left-hand end of the luggage
cover roller in its location B behind the rear
bench seat.
F Compress the roller control 1 and put the
roller in place in its location C on the right.
F Release the control to secure the luggage
cover.
F Unreel it to its fastening on the rear pillar.
3
Ease of use and comfort
89
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
High load retaining net
(Tourer)
Hooked onto the special upper and lower
fixings, this permits use of the entire loading
volume up to the roof:
- behind the rear seats (row 2),
- behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear
seats are folded.
When positioning the net, check that the strap
loops are visible from the boot; this will make
slackening or tightening easier.
Installation
F Fold down the backrests of the rear seats.
F Position the high load retaining net roller
above the two rails 1 located behind
the rear seats (2/3 bench seat). The
two notches 2 must be placed above the
two rails.
F Slide the two rails 1 into the notches 2 and
push the roller (lengthways) from right to
left to secure it.
F Reposition the rear seat backrests.
Ease of use and comfort
90
C5_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016
Row 1
To use it in row 1:
F fold down the backrests of the rear seats,
F open the covers 3 of the corresponding
upper fixings,
F unroll the high load retaining net and
position one of the ends of the net's metal
bar in the corresponding fixing cover.
Check that the hook is secured in the rail
located inside the cover 3,
F pull the high load retaining net's metal bar
to position the other hook in the second
fixing cover.
Row 2
To use it in row 2:
F open the covers 4 of the corresponding
upper fixings,
F from the rear bench seat, unroll the high
load retaining net, pushing it to detach it
from the retaining hooks,
F position one of the ends of the net's metal
bar in the corresponding fixing cover.
Check that the hook is secured in the rail,
located inside the cover 4,
F position the other hook in the second fixing
cover and pull the metal bar towards you.
4
91
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Observe the driving regulations and remain
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
react at any time to any eventuality.
On a long journey, a break every two hours is
strongly recommended.
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate
the need to brake and increase the distance
from other vehicles.
Driving on flooded
roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
roads, as this could cause serious damage
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
electrical systems of your vehicle.
Driving recommendations
Important!
Never drive with the parking brake
applied - Risk of overheating and
damage to the braking system!
Risk of fire!
As the exhaust system of your vehicle
is very hot, even several minutes after
switching off the engine, do not park
or run the engine over areas where
inflammable substances and materials
are present: grass, leaves, etc.
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised
with the engine running. If you have
to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, apply the parking brake
and put the gearbox into neutral or
position N or P, depending on the type
of gearbox.
If you are obliged to drive through water:
- check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves
that might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system,
- drive as slowly as possible without
stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph
(10 km/h),
- do not stop and do not switch off the
engine.
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as
circumstances allow, make several light brake
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
92
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has
a special code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
In the event of a fault, you are
informed by illumination of this
warning lamp, an audible signal and
a message in the screen.
In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact
a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
Starting-switching off the engine
Keep safely, away from your vehicle,
the label attached to the keys given to
you on acquisition of the vehicle.
Ignition switch
It has 3 positions:
- position 1 (Stop): insert and removing the
key, steering column locked,
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column
unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating,
engine running,
- position 3 (Starting).
Ignition on position
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
equipment or portable devices to be charged.
Do not attach heavy objects to the key
or remote control: by weighing down on
the key when in the ignition switch, this
could cause a fault.
In addition, a heavy or sharp object
could interfere with the deployment of
the knee airbag or be thrown about and
cause serious injuries in the event of
deployment of the knee airbag.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few moments
after the ignition is switched off and prevents
starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
Once the state of charge of the battery drops
to the reserve level, the system switches to
energy economy mode: the power supply is
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
battery charge.
4
93
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Starting the engine
Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the
instrument panel then operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
With the parking brake applied and the gearbox
in neutral or position N or P:
F depress the clutch pedal fully (manual
gearbox),
or
F press the brake pedal firmly (automatic
gearbox),
F insert the key into the ignition switch; the
system recognises the code,
F unlock the steering column by simultaneously
turning the steering and the key.
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
Never leave the engine running in
an enclosed area without adequate
ventilation: internal combustion
engines emit toxic exhaust gases,
such as carbon monoxide. Danger of
intoxication and death!
In very severe wintry conditions
(temperatures below -23°C), to ensure
the correct operation and durability of
the mechanical components of your
vehicle, engine and gearbox, it is
necessary to leave the engine running
for 4 minutes before moving off.
In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
can stay on for a longer period. When
the engine is hot, the warning lamp
does not come on.
In certain cases, you may have to apply
more force to the steering (wheels on
full lock, for example).
F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
position 2, ignition on, to operate the
engine pre-heating system.
If the engine does not start straight
away, switch off the ignition. Wait a
few moments before operating the
starter motor again. If the engine does
not start after several attempts, do not
keep trying: you risk damaging the
starter motor or the engine. Contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In temperate conditions, do not leave
the engine at idle to warm up but move
off straight away and drive at moderate
speed.
94
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Do not flick the accelerator at the
moment of switching off the ignition.
This could cause serious damage to the
turbocharger(s).
Vehicles equipped with a
turbocharger
Never stop the engine without having allowed it
to run for a few seconds at idle, this being the
time required for the turbocharger to return to a
normal speed.
Energy economy mode
After switching off the engine (position 1-Stop),
for a maximum of 30 minutes you can still use
functions such as the audio and telematic
system, the wipers, dipped beam headlamps,
courtesy lamps, ...
Switching off the engine
F Stop the vehicle.
F With the engine running at idle, turn the key
to position 1.
F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
F To lock the steering column, turn the
steering until it locks.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
To facilitate unlocking of the steering
column, it is recommended that the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
position before switching off the engine.
Never switch off the ignition before the
vehicle is at a complete stop. With the
engine off, the braking and steering
assistance systems are also cut off: risk
of loss of control of the vehicle.
For more information on Energy
economy mode, refer to the
corresponding section.
F Check that the parking brake is correctly
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
Key left in the "Ignition on"
position
If the key has been left in the ignition switch
at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be
switched off automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the
key to position 1 (Stop), then back to
position 2 (Ignition on).
4
95
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Manual parking brake
Mechanical device for immobilising the vehicle when stationary.
This warning lamp comes on if the
parking brake is engaged or not fully
released.
If the parking brake is released, the
illumination of this warning lamp along with
the STOP warning lamp indicates that the
brake fluid level is low or a fault with the brake
force distributor.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Application
F Pull the parking brake lever up to
immobilise your vehicle.
To facilitate the action on the lever, you are
recommended to press the brake pedal at the
same time.
Release
F Press on the end of the lever whilst pulling
it then lower it fully.
In all circumstances, as a precautionary
measure, engage first gear.
On steep gradients, turn the steering
wheel towards the pavement.
96
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Electric parking brake
The electric parking brake combines
2 operating modes:
Automatic operation
Application with the engine off
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
Application with the engine running
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle
you need to manually apply the parking brake
by pulling the control lever A.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A coming on,
- display of a message "Parking brake
applied" in the instrument panel screen.
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A coming on,
- display of a message "Parking brake
applied" in the instrument panel screen.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel coming on,
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel coming on,
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
warning lamp P and the warning lamp in
the instrument panel are on.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
warning lamp P and the warning lamp in
the instrument panel are on.
- Automatic
Automatic application when the engine
stops and automatic release on use of the
accelerator (activated by default).
- Manual
Manual application / release of the parking
brake is always possible by pulling control
lever A while pressing the brake pedal.
When the driver’s door is opened, a beep is
heard and a message displayed if the parking
brake has not been applied.
The noise of operation will confirm to you the
application / release of the electric parking
brake.
4
97
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Release
The electric parking brake releases
automatically and progressively as the
vehicle moves off:
F with a manual gearbox (first gear or
reverse gear engaged), press down fully
on the clutch pedal, then press on the
accelerator pedal and move off,
F with an automatic gearbox, accelerate
with the selector in position D, M or R.
Full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A going off,
- display of a message "Parking brake
released" in the instrument panel screen.
Activation / Deactivation of the
automatic functions
Depending on the country of sale, automatic
application when switching off the engine and
automatic release when moving off can be
deactivated. The activation / deactivation is
done in the vehicle parameters menu.
Deactivation of these functions is
signalled by this warning lamp in the
instrument panel.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel going off,
In some special circumstances, with
the engine not running, (towing, icy
conditions...) the automatic parking
brake can be released manually, with
the key in the running position.
If the vehicle parameters menu does
not have the option to activate /
deactivate the automatic functions, this
can be done by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
With the automatic functions deactivated, the
parking brake must be applied and released
manually.
When stationary, with the engine
running, do not press the accelerator
pedal unnecessarily (particularly when
starting the engine, including in neutral),
as you may release the parking brake.
Do not place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone...) between the
gear lever and the electric parking
brake control.
98
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Manual operation
Application
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking
brake whether the engine is running or off, pull
the control lever A.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A coming on,
- display of a message "Parking brake
applied" in the instrument panel screen.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel coming on,
When the driver’s door is opened with the
engine running, a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal if the
parking brake has not been applied.
Manual application / release of the parking
brake is always possible.
Release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake, press on the brake
pedal, push then release control lever A.
The full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A going off,
- display of a message "Parking brake
released" in the instrument panel screen.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel going off,
When stationary, with the engine running, do
not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
as you may release the parking brake.
If you push control lever A without pressing
the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be
released and the message "Foot on brake" will
be displayed in the instrument panel screen.
4
99
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Maximum application
If necessary, you can make a maximum
application of the parking brake. It is obtained
by means of a long pull on control lever A,
until you see the message "Max application
of the parking brake" and an audible signal
is heard.
Maximum application is essential:
- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan
or a trailer, if the automatic functions are
activated but you are applying the parking
brake manually,
- when the effective gradient you are parked
on is variable (e.g. on a ferry, in a lorry,
during towing).
Particular situations
In certain situations (starting the engine...), the
parking brake can automatically alter its level of
application. This is normal operation.
To advance your vehicle a few centimetres
without starting the engine, but with the ignition
on, press on the brake pedal and release the
parking brake by pushing then releasing
control lever A.
The full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the warning lamp P in the control
lever and the warning lamp in the instrument
panel going off and the display of a message
"Parking brake released" in the instrument
panel screen.
To ensure correct operation of the parking
brake and therefore your safety, the number of
successive application / release operations is
limited to eight.
If this number is exceeded, you are warned by
the message "Parking brake faulty" and a
warning lamp flashes.
In the event of a battery failure, it will
not be possible to operate the electric
parking brake.
As a safety measure if the parking
brake is not applied, immobilise the
vehicle by engaging a gear or by
placing a chock against one of the
wheels.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Please note...
- in the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or
parking on a gradient, turn the front wheels
towards the pavement and engage a gear
when you park,
- after a maximum application, the release
time will be longer.
100
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
If a failure of the DSC system is
signalled by the illumination of this
warning lamp, then braking stability is
not guaranteed. In this event, stability
must be assured by the driver by
repeating alternate "pull - release"
actions on control lever A.
The dynamic emergency braking
should only be used in exceptional
circumstances.
If it is not possible to immobilise the
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Dynamic emergency
braking
In the event of a failure of the vehicle’s main
braking system or in an exceptional situation
(e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction) pull and
hold control lever A to stop the vehicle.
The dynamic stability control system (DSC)
provides stability during dynamic emergency
braking.
If there is a fault with the dynamic emergency
braking, one of the following messages will be
displayed in the instrument panel screen:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".
4
101
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
1
Electric parking brake problem and display of the
message "Parking brake faulty" and of the following
warning lamps:
If the electric parking brake problem warning lamp and the service warning
lamp come on, position the vehicle in a safe location (on flat ground, with a gear
engaged).
2
Display of the messages "Parking brake faulty" and
"Anti roll-back fault" and of the following warning
lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- The hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake is only available manually.
3
Display of the messages "Parking brake faulty" and
"Anti roll-back fault" and of the following warning
lamp:
- Manual release of the electric parking brake is not available.
- The hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and manual application are still available.
If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Operating faults
102
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
4
Display of the messages "Parking brake faulty" and
"Anti roll-back fault" and of the following warning lamps:
and/or flashing
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- The hill start assist is not available.
To apply the electric parking brake:
F Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
F Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum application.
F Switch on the ignition and check that the electric parking brake warning lamps
are on.
- Application may take longer than in normal operation.
- If the warning lamp (!) flashes or if the warning lamps do not come on when
the ignition is switched on, this method does not work. Have it checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
To release the electric parking brake:
F Switch on the ignition.
F Push the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.
5
Display of the message "Parking brake control
faulty – automatic mode activated" and of the
following warning lamps:
and/or flashing
- Only the functions for automatic application on switching off the engine and
automatic release on acceleration are available.
- Manual application / release of the electric parking brake and dynamic
emergency braking are unavailable.
6
Display of the message "Parking brake faulty" and of
the following warning lamp:
flashing
- Application of the parking brake is not guaranteed.
- The parking brake is temporarily unavailable.
It this situation arises:
F Wait approximately 3 minutes.
F After 3 minutes, if the warning lamp is still flashing, try to reinitialise the parking
brake, either by pushing and releasing the control A while pressing the brake
pedal or by means of a long pull on control lever A.
7
Battery problem - Illumination of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop the vehicle
as soon as traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle.
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
4
103
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Hill start assist
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- in certain conditions on a gradient,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist function cannot be
deactivated.
Operation
On an ascending gradient, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held for a brief
moment when you release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral on
a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in D or M on an automatic
gearbox.
On a descending gradient, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held for a brief moment when you
release the brake pedal.
Do not exit the vehicle while it is being
held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
manually and ensure that the parking
brake warning lamp (in the instrument
panel) is on fixed (not flashing).
104
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
6-speed manual gearbox
F Move the lever fully to the right to
engage 5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear Engaging reverse
gear
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
Failure to follow this advice may cause
permanent damage to the gearbox
(engagement of 3
rd
or 4
th
gear by
mistake).
F Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
4
105
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Mode selection
Displays in the instrument panel
F Automatic mode: gear selector in
position D.
F Manual mode: gear selector in position M.
F SPORT programme: gear selector in
position D and button A pressed,
F SNOW programme: gear selector in
position D and button B pressed.
The position of the gear selector and the
driving mode are displayed in the right-hand
dial of the instrument panel.
A position grille associated with the gear selector
allows you to view the selected position.
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox which offers a choice
between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by the sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Two driving modes are provided:
- automatic operation for electronic control
of the gears by the gearbox, associated
with:
● a SPORT programme for a more
dynamic driving style,
● a SNOW programme to improve driving
when the grip is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.
As a safety measure:
- position P can be disengaged only
by pressing the brake pedal,
- when a door is opened, an audible
signal is heard if the gear selector
is not in position P,
- always make sure that the gear
selector is in position P before you
leave your vehicle.
If the gearbox is in position P but the
position of the gear selector is different,
reposition the gear selector at P so that
you can start the vehicle.
106
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Moving off
F To start the engine, the gear selector must
be in position P or N.
F Operate the starter.
F When the engine is running, place the gear
selector at R, D or M.
F Check in the instrument panel, the position
engaged.
F Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
F To avoid a possible difference between the
position of the gear selector and the actual
position of the gearbox, always come out
of position P with the ignition on and brake
pedal applied.
Otherwise, when the ignition is on or the engine
is running:
F reposition the gear selector at position P,
F put your foot on the brake pedal and then
select the gear you want.
Park
This position of the gear selector
is used to prevent the vehicle from
moving when you are stationary.
Reverse gear
Only engage this position when the
vehicle is stationary. To prevent
snatching, do not accelerate too soon
after selection.
Neutral
Never select position N if the vehicle
is moving.
F To select position P, move the gear selector
back to the highest position (towards R),
then push it forwards and then to the left.
F To exit position P, move the gear selector to
the right and then to the position you want.
F Only engage this position when the vehicle
is completely stationary. In this position,
the front wheels are locked. Make sure that
the gear selector is correctly positioned.
Never select position P or R if the
vehicle is not stationary.
If, while the vehicle is moving,
position N is engaged inadvertently,
allow the engine to idle before engaging
position D or M.
4
107
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Automatic operation
F Move the gear selector to position D.
The gearbox continuously selects the
gear that is best suited to the following
conditions:
- driving style,
- road profile,
- vehicle load.
When braking, the gearbox may change down
automatically in order to provide effective
engine braking.
If you lift your foot off the accelerator abruptly,
the gearbox will not engage a higher gear.
Manual operation
Position of the gear selector for manual gear
changing.
F Move the gear selector to position M.
F Push the gear selector towards the "+" sign
to change up a gear.
F Pull the gear selector towards the "-" sign
to change down a gear.
If the vehicle stops or reduces speed (for
example when approaching a stop sign), the
gearbox changes down automatically, to first
gear if the speed drops sufficiently.
In manual mode, it is not necessary to release
the accelerator during gear changes.
Gear change instructions are accepted only if
the engine speed permits it.
The SPORT and SNOW programmes do not
operate in manual mode.
For certain manoeuvres (for example
overtaking), you can obtain maximum
acceleration by pressing the accelerator pedal
hard down past the point of resistance, which
then produces an automatic change down to a
lower gear.
The gearbox operates without requiring any
intervention on your part.
108
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
SPORT and SNOW
programmes
SPORT programme "S"
These two special programmes supplement
the automatic operation in very particular
conditions of use.
F With the gear selector in position D and the
engine running, press button A.
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic
driving style.
SNOW programme "T"
F With the gear selector in position D and the
engine running, press button B.
The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery
roads.
This programme makes moving off easier and
improves traction in conditions of poor grip.
T appears in the instrument panel.
S appears in the instrument panel.
Return to automatic
operation
F At any time, press the button selected
again to exit from the programme engaged
and return to auto-adaptive mode.
A strong snatch may be felt when
selecting R for reverse gear.
In the event of a fault, the gearbox is
blocked in one gear; do not exceed a
speed of 62 mph (100 km/h).
Do not turn off the engine while the gear
selector is in position D or R.
Never press the accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously. Braking and
acceleration should be done with the
right foot only. Pressing both pedals
simultaneously may damage the
gearbox.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the temperature is below -23°C, the
engine should be left running at idle
for four minutes, in order to ensure the
correct operation and durability of the
engine and gearbox.
4
109
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most appropriate gear.
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
The gear engagement recommendations must
not be considered compulsory. Indeed, the
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
and safety remain determining factors when
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
Example:
- You are in third gear.
- You press the accelerator pedal.
Gear shift indicator*
Operation
With an automatic gearbox, the system
is only active in manual mode.
* Depending on engine.
The information appears in the instrument
panel in the form of an arrow.
On vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox,
the arrow may be accompanied by the gear
recommended.
The system adapts its gear change
recommendation according to the
driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration, braking, ...).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear,
- changing down.
- The system may suggest that you engage
a higher gear.
110
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Stop & Start
Operation
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds below
12 mph (20 km/h) with BlueHDi Diesel
versions, when you put the gear selector
into neutral and release the clutch pedal,
- with an automatic gearbox, vehicle
stationary, when you press the brake pedal
or place the gear selector in position N.
Going into engine STOP
mode
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel and the engine
goes into standby automatically:
If your vehicle is fitted with the
system, a time counter calculates
the sum of the periods in STOP
mode during a journey. It resets
itself to zero every time the
ignition is switched on with the
key.
The Stop & Start system puts the engine
temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during
stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams...).
The engine restarts automatically - START
mode - as soon as you want to move off.
The restart takes place instantly, quickly and
silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
emissions as well as the noise level when
stationary.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition
with the key.
For your comfort, when parking, STOP
is not available for a few seconds after
coming out of reverse.
The Stop & Start system does not affect
the functionality of the vehicle, such as
braking, power steering...
4
111
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
depress the clutch pedal,
- with an automatic gearbox:
● gear selector in position D or M, when
you release the brake pedal,
● or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you place the gear
selector in position D or M,
● or when you engage reverse gear.
Going into engine START
mode
The "ECO" warning lamp goes off
and the engine starts automatically:
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
In this case the "ECO" warning
lamp flashes for few seconds, then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
For safety reasons or to ensure smooth
operation, START mode is invoked
automatically when:
- you open the driver's door,
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 16 mph
(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox or 2 mph
(3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox for
BlueHDi Diesel versions,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance, air
conditioning setting...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
Special cases: STOP mode
unavailable
In this case, the "ECO" warning
lamp flashes for a few seconds, then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
STOP mode is not invoked when:
- the vehicle is on a steep slope
(up or down),
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using
the key,
- the electric parking brake is applied or
being applied,
- the engine is needed to maintain a
comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
exterior temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
With a manual gearbox in STOP mode,
if a gear is engaged without fully
depressing the clutch pedal, a warning
lamp comes on or an alert message
is displayed asking you to depress the
clutch pedal to restart the engine.
112
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Opening the bonnet
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid the risk of injury related
to an automatic change to START
mode.
Driving on flooded roads
Before driving through a flooded road,
it is strongly recommended that you
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
For more information on Driving
advice, particularly on flooded roads,
refer to the corresponding section.
At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to
deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp
coming on, accompanied by the display of a
message.
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is
confirmed by the switch warning lamp
going off and the display of a message.
In certain circumstances, such as the need
to maintain a comfortable temperature in the
passenger compartment, it may be useful to
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
The system can be deactivated at any time,
once the ignition is on.
Deactivation / Manual reactivation
If the engine is in STOP mode, it then
restarts.
The Stop & Start system is
automatically reactivated every time the
ignition is switched on.
4
113
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction with the system,
the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes
for a few seconds, then comes on continuously.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP
mode, the vehicle may stall. All of
the instrument panel warning lamps
come on.
Depending on version, an alert
message may also be displayed
asking you to put the gear selector into
position N and to put your foot on the
brake pedal.
It is then necessary to switch off the
ignition, then restart the engine using
the key.
The Stop & Start requires the use of a
12 V battery of special technology and
characteristics.
All work on this type of battery must
only be carried out by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
For more information on the
12 V battery, refer to the corresponding
section.
114
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Tyre under-ination detection
System which automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system continuously monitors the
pressures of the four tyres, as soon as the
vehicle is moving.
The tyre under-inflation detection
system is an aid to driving which does
not replace the need for vigilance on
the part of the driver.
This system does not avoid the need
to check the tyre pressures regularly
(including the spare wheel) and before
a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
adversely affects road holding,
extends braking distances and causes
premature tyre wear, particularly under
arduous conditions (vehicle loaded,
high speed, long journey).
The tyre pressures for your vehicle can
be found on the tyre pressure label.
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres are cold (vehicle
stopped for 1 hour or after driving for
less then 6 miles (10 km) at moderate
speed). Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the
values indicated on the label.
For more information on Identification
markings, including the tyre pressure
label, refer to the corresponding
section.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
increases fuel consumption.
Pressure sensors are located in the valve of
each tyre (except the spare wheel).
The system triggers an alert if a drop in
pressure is detected in one or more tyres.
4
115
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
The loss of pressure detected does not
always lead to visible deformation of
the tyre.
Do not rely on just a visual check.
The alert is maintained until the tyre or
tyres concerned is reinflated, repaired
or replaced.
The spare wheel (space-saver type or a
steel rim) does not have a sensor.
Under-inflation alert
The alert is given by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal, and depending on
equipment, the display of a message.
In the event of a problem on one of the tyres,
the symbol or the message appears, depending
on equipment, to identify it.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid sudden
steering movements or harsh brake
applications.
F Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
F If you have a compressor (e.g. the one in
the temporary puncture repair kit), check
the four tyre pressures when cold.
If it is not possible to check the tyre
pressures at the time, drive carefully at
reduced speed.
or
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (depending on equipment).
Operating fault
The flashing and then fixed illumination
of the under-inflation warning lamp
accompanied by the illumination of the
service warning lamp indicates a fault
with the system.
This alert is also displayed when one or
more wheels is not fitted with a sensor
(e.g. a space-saver or steel spare wheel).
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked
or, following the repair of a puncture, to
have the original wheel, equipped with a
sensor, refitted.
Any tyre repair or replacement on a
wheel fitted with this system must be
carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If after changing a tyre, a wheel is not
detected by your vehicle (e.g. fitting
snow tyres), you must have the system
reinitialised by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In this case, monitoring of the tyre pressures is
not assured.
116
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Fixed centred controls steering wheel
1
Rotate
● Scroll the various pages of information in the instrument panel screen.
● Move through the various menus in the instrument panel screen.
● Increase / Decrease values.
Short press
● Open the main menu in the instrument panel screen (only when stationary).
● Select and confirm information.
Long press
Reset the trip data for the trip selected (if the corresponding trip computer page is
displayed).
2
Short press
● Cancel the current operation.
● Return to the previous screen in the instrument panel screen.
Long press Return to the initial page in the instrument panel screen.
3
Short press Increase the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h) / Store the speed.
Press and hold Increase the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
4
Short press Decrease the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h) / Store the speed.
Press and hold Decrease the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
5 Short press
Suspend or resume cruise control/speed limiter (depending on the mode
selected).
6 Short press
Select cruise control or speed limiter mode (the cycle on this button will always
begin with selection of the speed limiter).
7 Short press Deactivate cruise control/speed limiter.
8
Short press
● Accept an incoming call.
● End the current call.
● Open the telephone short-cut menu.
● Confirm in the list and in the telephone menu.
Long press Reject an incoming call.
9 Short press / Long press Horn.
10 Short press Activate / Deactivate Black Panel mode (comfortable night driving display).
11 Long press Activate voice recognition on the telephone via MirrorLink.
4
117
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
12
Rotate
● Radio: Scroll the pre-set stations.
● CD / MP3 / jukebox: Scroll through tracks or folders.
● Multifunction screen menus: Move and increase / decrease.
Short press
● Multifunction screen menus: confirm the selection.
● Open the short-cut menus (depending on the page displayed in the
multifunction screen).
13
Short press
● Cancel the current operation and return to the previous display in the
multifunction screen.
● Reject an incoming call.
Long press Return to the initial page in the multifunction screen.
14 Short press Access to the multifunction screen main menu.
15 Short press / Press and hold Volume increase.
16 Short press / Press and hold Volume decrease.
17 Short press
● First press: mute.
● Second press: restore sound.
18
Short press
● Radio: Automatic search of higher frequencies.
● CD / MP3 / jukebox: Search for the next track.
Maintained press CD / MP3 / jukebox: fast play in fast forward.
19
Short press
● Radio: Automatic search of lower frequencies.
● CD / MP3 / jukebox: Search for the previous track.
Press and hold CD / MP3 / jukebox: Fast play in rewind.
20
Short press
● Radio: display the list of radio stations.
● CD / MP3: display the list of tracks and folders.
● Jukebox: display the list of albums.
Long press Update the list of radio stations.
21 Short press / Long press Horn.
22 Short press MODE: select the function displayed in the multifunction screen.
118
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Speed limiter
Steering mounted controls
The speed limiter switches are located on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
1. Increase the programmed speed.
2. Decrease the programmed speed.
3. Speed limiter On / Pause.
4. Select speed limiter mode.
5. Deactivate the speed limiter.
Displays in the instrument panel
The information related to the speed limiter is
grouped together in zone A of the instrument
panel.
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver.
When the limit speed is reached, the
accelerator pedal no longer has any effect.
The speed limiter is switched on manually: a
speed of at least 20 mph (approx. 30 km/h)
must be programmed.
The speed limiter can in no circumstances
replace keeping to speed limits or the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
4
119
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
F Press button 4 to select "LIMIT" speed limiter
mode.
The selection is confirmed by the display of the
"LIMIT" function in zone A of the instrument panel.
Activation
F Press button 3 when the desired maximum
speed is displayed.
The information "ON" then appears in zone A
of the instrument panel.
When the function is selected, the
last memorised speed and the
information "PAUSE" are displayed.
With the engine running, you can adjust the
memorised maximum speed, displayed in
zone A, by pressing:
F Button 1 to increase the memorised
maximum speed.
F Button 2 to decrease the memorised
maximum speed.
Successive presses will modify the limit
speed setting in steps of 1 mph (km/h) and a
continuous press in steps of 5 mph (km/h).
Programming
F Press button 3.
This action causes the information "PAUSE" to
appear in zone A of the instrument panel.
This action does not cancel the memorised
maximum speed which remains displayed in
zone A of the instrument panel.
Pause / Resume
120
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
The accelerator pedal has a stiff point at the
end of its travel. To exceed the maximum speed
setting at any time, you can press the pedal
all the way down. While the speed is being
exceeded, the speed displayed in zone A will
flash. Simply release the accelerator pedal to
return below the maximum speed and restore
the limiter function.
Return to normal
driving
Operating fault
If there is a fault, a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal and
illumination of the SERVICE warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Exceeding the programmed
speed
In the event of a steep descent or
under excessive acceleration, the
speed limiter (which does not act
on the brakes) may not be able to
prevent the vehicle from exceeding the
programmed speed.
Use of a floor mat other than that
recommended by CITROËN may affect
the normal operation of the accelerator
pedal and hamper the operation of the
speed limiter.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
are fitted with a 3rd fixing located in
the pedal area to avoid any risk of
interference with the pedals.
The speed will also flash if the speed limiter is
not able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding
the programmed speed setting (e.g. on a steep
descent or under excessive acceleration).
To reactivate the speed limiter, release the
accelerator to slow to a speed lower than the
programmed speed.
F Press button 5.
F Or select the speed limiter function.
F Or stop the engine.
4
121
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Cruise control
Displays in the instrument panel
The information related to the cruise control is
grouped together in zone A of the instrument
panel.
Steering mounted controls
The cruise control switches are located on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
1. Activate the cruise control at the current
speed of the vehicle, then increase the
programmed speed.
2. Activate the cruise control at the current
speed of the vehicle, then decrease the
programmed speed.
3. Pause / Restore the cruise control.
4. Select cruise control mode.
5. Deactivate the cruise control.
System which automatically maintains the
vehicle speed programmed by the driver,
without any action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually:
the vehicle speed must be at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) and you must be in at least:
- 4th gear for a manual gearbox,
- 2nd gear for an automatic gearbox.
The driver must remain attentive and in
complete control of the vehicle.
You are recommended to keep your feet
within range of the pedals.
122
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Exceeding the programmed
speed
While cruise control is in operation, it is always
possible to go above the programmed speed
simply by pressing the accelerator pedal (for
example to overtake another vehicle).
The speed displayed in zone A flashes.
You only have to release the accelerator pedal
to return to the programmed speed.
Programming
The selection is confirmed by the display of the "CRUISE"
function in zone A of the instrument panel.
When the function is selected, no cruising speed has
yet been memorised.
Once the desired speed has been reached
using the accelerator, press button 1 or 2. The
cruising speed is then memorised and cruise
control is activated. The cruising speed is
displayed in zone A of the instrument panel,
and "ON" is displayed.
Adjusting the memorised
speed while the cruise
control is in operation
You can adjust the memorised speed,
displayed in zone A, by pressing:
- Button 1 to increase the speed.
- Button 2 to reduce the speed.
Successive presses will modify the cruise
speed in steps of 1 mph (km/h) and a
continuous press in steps of 5 mph (km/h).
You can then release the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will automatically keep to the speed
chosen.
The vehicle speed may vary slightly from that
memorised.
If during cruise control the system cannot keep
to the cruise speed (e.g. on a steep descent),
then the speed flashes. If necessary, brake to
curb your speed.
F Press button 4 to select "CRUISE" cruise
control mode.
4
123
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Reactivation
- By recalling the memorised speed
After deactivation, press button 3. Your
vehicle automatically returns to the
memorised cruise speed setting. The
memorised speed and "ON" are displayed
in zone A.
If the memorised cruise speed setting is
higher than the current speed, the vehicle
will accelerate strongly to reach the current
speed.
- By selecting the current speed
Press button 1 or 2 once the desired speed
has been reached.
The new speed and "ON" will appear in
zone A.
Return to normal driving
F Press button 5.
F Or select the cruise control function.
F Or stop the engine.
The speed that was chosen is no longer
memorised.
"PAUSE" will then be displayed in zone A of
the instrument panel.
These actions do not cancel the cruise
speed setting which remains displayed in the
instrument panel.
Operating fault
If there is a fault, a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal and
illumination of the SERVICE warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Cruise control must only be used where
the traffic conditions permit driving at a
constant speed.
Do not use it on congested roads or
when the weather or the road conditions
are poor.
Pause / Resume
F Either by pressing the brake or clutch
pedal.
F Or by pressing button 3.
F Or by the DSC or ASR systems being
active.
For vehicles with a manual gearbox, cruise
control is deactivated if the gear lever is in
neutral.
124
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Lane departure warning system
This system is particularly useful on motorways
and main roads.
Activation
F When switching the ignition on or with
the engine running, press this button; the
indicator lamp comes on.
Deactivation
F Press this button again, the indicator lamp
goes off.
The status of the system remains in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
Detection
You are warned by the vibration of the driver's
seat cushion:
- on the right-hand side, if the marking on
the ground has been crossed on the right,
- on the left-hand side, if the marking on the
ground has been crossed on the left.
No warning is transmitted while the direction
indicator is active and for approximately
20 seconds after the direction indicator is
switched off.
A warning may be transmitted if a direction
marking (e.g. arrow) or non-standard marking
(e.g. graffiti) is crossed.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction, the service
warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the screen.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
System which detects the involuntary crossing
of longitudinal traffic lane markings on the
ground (solid or broken line).
Sensors, fitted below the front bumper, trigger
a warning if the vehicle drifts over a lane
marking (speed higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).
The detection may be impeded:
- if the sensors are dirty (mud, snow...),
- if the markings on the ground are
worn,
- if there is little contrast between the
markings on the ground and the road
surface.
The lane departure warning system
cannot in any circumstances replace
the need for vigilance on the part of the
driver.
It is necessary to observe driving
regulations and take a break every
two hours.
4
125
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Parking space sensors
System which measures the parking space
available between two vehicles or obstacles. It
measures the size of the space and gives you
information on:
- the possibility of fitting into a free space,
depending on the dimensions of your
vehicle and the distances necessary for
your manoeuvres,
- the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to
be performed.
The system does not measure spaces which
are clearly much smaller or larger than the size
of the vehicle.
The parking space sensor system warning
lamp can have three different states:
- off: the system is not selected,
- on fixed: the system is selected but the
conditions for measuring are not yet met
(direction indicator not operating, speed too
high) or the measurement is terminated.
- flashing: measurement is in progress or
the message is being displayed.
You can select the "parking space sensor"
system by pressing button A. The fixed
illumination of the warning lamp indicates that
the system is selected.
During the measurement, the message
"Measurement in progress - Vmax 20 km/h
(12 mph)" is displayed in the instrument panel
screen.
Displays in the instrument panel
126
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Operation
You have identified a parking space:
F Press button A to select the system.
F Activate the direction indicator on the side
where the space is to be measured.
F During measurement, go forward the
length of the space, at a speed less than
12 mph (approx. 20 km/h), to prepare for
your manoeuvre.
The system then measures the size of the space.
F The system informs you of the level
of difficulty of the manoeuvre via a
message in the instrument panel screen
accompanied by an audible signal.
F Depending on the message issued by the
system, you may or may not be able to
perform the manoeuvre.
The system displays the following types of message:
Parking YES
Parking DIFFICULT
Parking NO
The system is deselected automatically:
- when you engage reverse gear,
- when you switch off the ignition,
- if measurement is not requested,
- within five minutes of selection of the
system,
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the
threshold of 45 mph (approx. 70 km/h) for
one minute.
If the lateral distance between your vehicle and
the parking space is too large, the system may
not be able to measure the space.
The system remains available after each
measurement and thus can measure more than
one space during your search.
In bad weather conditions or in winter, make
sure that the sensors are not covered by dirt, or
by ice or snow.
The parking space sensor system deactivates
the front parking sensors during space
measurement when you are in forward gear.
If there is a fault, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
4
127
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Parking sensors
Operation
The parking sensors system cannot, in
any circumstances, replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
This system detects any obstacle (person,
vehicle, tree, barrier...) located in front of or
behind the vehicle, however, it will not be able
to detect obstacles located immediately below
the bumper.
An object, such as a stake, a roadworks cone
or any other similar object may be detected at
the start of the manoeuvre but may no longer
be detected when the vehicle moves nearer
to it.
At the front and/or at the rear
This system is comprised of proximity sensors,
installed in the front and/or rear bumper.
Visual and audible assistance
The proximity information is indicated by:
- an audible signal which becomes more rapid
as the vehicle approaches the obstacle,
- a diagram in the multifunction screen, with
blocks which move closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to the emission
of the audible signal by the speakers; front or rear
and right or left.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle is less than approximately thirty
centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol appears,
depending on the multifunction screen version.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered with
mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
When the speed of the vehicle is below
about 6 mph (10 km/h), some sources
of noise (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic
drill, ...) may trigger the audible parking
sensor signals.
The parking sensors are switched on:
- by engaging reverse gear,
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in
forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible signal and
the display of the vehicle in the multifunction
screen.
The parking sensors are switched off:
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been stationary for
more than three seconds in forward gear.
128
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Reactivation
Deactivation
The system will be deactivated
automatically when a trailer is being
towed or when a bicycle carrier is fitted
(towbar or bicycle carrier recommended
by CITROËN).
With the control on the
dashboard
F Press control A to deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the illumination of the
indicator lamp in the control.
With the touch screen tablet
F Press the MENU button.
F In the main menu, select the "Driving"
menu.
F Go to the secondary page, then select
"Vehicle settings".
F Uncheck the "Parking sensors" line to
deactivate the system.
F Press on "Confirm" to save the
modification and quit.
With the control on the
dashboard
F Press control A again to reactivate the
system.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
control going off.
With the touch screen tablet
F Press the MENU button again.
F In the main menu, select the "Driving"
menu.
F Go to the secondary page, then select
"Vehicle settings".
F Check the "Parking sensors" line to
reactivate the system.
F Press on "Confirm" to save the
modification and quit.
4
129
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Reversing camera (Tourer)
A reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
The image is displayed in the navigation
screen.
The space between the blue lines represents
the width of your vehicle except for the door
mirrors.
The blue lines represent the general direction
of the vehicle.
The red lines represent a distance of about
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
bumper.
The green lines represent distances of
about 1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your
vehicle's rear bumper.
The projected lines displayed in the
screen do not allow the vehicle to
be placed relative to tall obstacles
(vehicles that are close for example).
Deformation of the image is normal.
Clean the reversing camera regularly
using a sponge and a soft cloth.
When cleaning the vehicle with a high
pressure jet wash, keep the lance
at least 30 cm from the lens of the
camera.
This system is a driving aid that does
not replace the need for vigilance on
the part of the driver, who must retain
control of their vehicle at all times.
130
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
"Hydractive III +" electronic suspension
The suspension automatically and instantly
adjusts to different driving styles and to
the profile of the road, providing the best
compromise between occupant comfort and
vehicle road holding.
The system alternates between soft and firm
suspension settings, maximising comfort at the
same time as constantly ensuring the highest
level of safety. It also automatically corrects
ride height, according to the vehicle load and
driving conditions.
In addition, the "Hydractive III +" system
allows you to choose between two modes of
suspension.
A change of suspension mode can be made
either when the vehicle is moving or when
stationary, by pressing button A.
Display in the instrument panel
The suspension mode selected is displayed in
the instrument panel screen.
Normal mode
This mode favours soft damping for
maximum comfort.
If the speed authorised for a
particular position is exceeded, the
vehicle reverts automatically to the
normal road position.
SPORT mode
This mode favours dynamic driving.
The warning lamp on button A comes
on in addition to the message in the
instrument panel screen.
SPORT mode is retained when you
switch off the engine.
Vehicle positions
Position changes may only be made when
the engine is running.
The adjustable ground clearance meets all
types of situation. Apart from a few specific
situations, the vehicle should be in the Normal
position.
F Press once on one of the adjustment
controls.
The change in position is indicated by a
message on the instrument panel screen.
4
131
Driving
C5_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Request not granted
The instrument panel screen temporarily displays a
message indicating that this position is not authorised.
The vehicle remains in the authorised position and the
instrument panel screen indicates this position to you.
Automatic variation of ground clearance
- If your speed exceeds 70 mph (approx.
110 km/h), on a good road surface, ground
clearance is lowered. The vehicle returns
to its normal position if the road surface
deteriorates or if your speed is lower than
55 mph (approx. 90 km/h).
- At low or medium speed, if the road surface
is poor, ground clearance is increased. The
vehicle returns to its normal position as
soon as conditions allow.
- On switching off the ignition, the ground
clearance is reduced to the parking position.
Normal position
If the speed authorised for a particular position
is exceeded, the vehicle reverts automatically
to the normal position.
Low position
To facilitate loading or unloading the vehicle.
For workshop inspections.
Not to be used in normal driving (not possible
if speed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).
High position
Changing a wheel (not possible if
speed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Mid-high position
For increased ground clearance (not possible
if speed > 25 mph (40 km/h)).
For use on difficult roads when travelling at
reduced speed, as well as on car park ramps.
For your safety if you are operating
underneath the vehicle, you must
support the vehicle with axle stands.
132
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Exterior lighting controls
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of the
vehicle are designed to adapt the driver's
visibility progressively in relation to the climatic
conditions:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are fitted to meet the requirements
of particular driving conditions:
- rear foglamps, to be seen from a distance,
- front foglamps for even better forward
vision,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering,
- daytime running lamps to be seen during
the day.
Settings
You can configure some functions:
- daytime running lamps,
- automatic illumination of headlamps,
- directional lighting,
- guide-me-home lighting.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
have been on for a few minutes.
Control stalk for the selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.
5
133
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Manual controls
Lighting off (ignition off) /
Daytime running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Sidelamps.
Dipped headlamps or main
beam headlamps.
B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull
the stalk towards you to switch the
lighting between dipped and main beam
headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
Displays
The lighting is controlled directly by the driver
by means of the ring A and the stalk B.
A. Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it
to position the symbol required facing the
mark.
C. Foglamps selection ring.
The foglamps operate with the sidelamps and
the dipped and main beam headlamps.
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is on.
134
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
- 1
st
turn forwards: front foglamps on.
- 2
nd
turn forwards: rear foglamps on.
- 1
st
turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.
- 2
nd
turn rearwards: front foglamps off.
Front and rear foglamps
In good or rainy weather, both day and
night, use of the front and rear foglamps
is prohibited. In these situations, the
power of their beams may dazzle other
drivers. They should only be used in fog
or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, it is your
responsibility to switch on the foglamps
and dipped headlamps manually as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Do not forget to switch off the front and
rear foglamps when they are no longer
needed.
Switching off the lighting when
switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
lamps switch off immediately, except for
the dipped beam headlamps if automatic
guide-me-home lighting is activated.
Switching on the lighting
after switching off the
ignition
To reactivate the lighting control stalk,
turn the ring A to position "0" - lighting
off, then to the position of your choice.
When the driver's door is opened, a
temporary audible signal warns you that
the vehicle's lighting is on.
They switch off automatically after a
period which depends on the state of
charge of the battery (entry to energy
economy mode).
5
135
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Daytime running lamps Manual guide-me-home
lighting
Switching on
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting stalk.
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time.
These special lamps, located at the front, make
the vehicle more visible by day.
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
They come on automatically and stay on, when
the engine is running and when the lighting
control stalk is at position 0 or AUTO.
136
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Linked with the automatic Guide-
me-home lighting
The link with the automatic illumination of
headlamps provides the guide-me-home
lighting with the following additional options:
- selection of the duration of lighting for 15,
30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle parameters
menu,
- automatic activation of the guide-me-home
lighting when automatic illumination of
headlamps is in operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the sunshine sensor,
the lighting comes on and a message appears
in the instrument panel screen, accompanied
by an audible signal.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Automatic illumination of headlamps
Activation
F
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position. The automatic
illumination of headlamps is accompanied by a
message in the instrument panel screen.
Deactivation
F Turn ring A to a position other than
"AUTO". Deactivation is accompanied by a
message in the instrument panel screen.
The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
switched on automatically, without any action
on the part of the driver, when a low level of
external light is detected or in certain cases of
activation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient
level or after the windscreen wipers are switched
off, the lamps are switched off automatically.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. Therefore,
the lighting will not come on
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
linked with the rain sensor and located
in the centre of the windscreen behind
the rear view mirror; the associated
functions would no longer operate.
5
137
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Manual headlamp
adjustment
To avoid dazzling other road users, the height
of the halogen bulb headlamps must be
adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised loads.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised loads.
Automatic adjustment of directional
headlamps
The system then places your headlamps in the
lowest position.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the instrument
panel screen.
Initial setting is position "0".
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, this system corrects the height of the
xenon headlamp beams automatically and when
stationary, depending on the load in the vehicle.
Do not touch the xenon bulbs. Contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Travelling abroad
If planning to use your vehicle in a
country that drives on the other side
of the road, we recommend that
you contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop to check whether
the headlamps need to be adjusted to
avoid dazzling on-coming drivers.
138
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Directional lighting
without cornering lighting
with cornering lighting
"Cornering lighting" function
Activation
This function is activated:
- when the direction indicator is activated,
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
Deactivation
This function is deactivated:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
- when stationary or at very low speed,
- when reverse gear is engaged,
- when the directional headlamps are
switched off.
With dipped or main beams, this function
provides additional lighting for the inside of a
bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph
(approx 40 km/h).
This lighting is most useful when travelling at
low and medium speed (urban driving, winding
road, junctions, parking manoeuvres...).
5
139
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Operating fault
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message in the
display screen.
"Directional headlamps" function
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
The state of the function remains in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
When stationary or moving at very low
speed or when reverse gear is engaged,
the function is inactive.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Programming
The function is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle parameters menu.
This function is activated by default.
When the dipped or main beam headlamps
are on, this function, associated with the
"Cornering lighting" function, enables the light
beam to follow the direction of the road.
The use of this function, linked with the xenon
headlamps only, considerably improves the
quality of your lighting when cornering.
140
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Wiper controls
Programming
You can modify the settings for the following
functions:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
Manual controls
Fast (heavy rain).
Normal (moderate rain).
Intermittent (proportional to the
speed of the vehicle).
Off.
Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk.
Automatic, then single wipe.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibility
progressively according to the weather
conditions.
Refer to the corresponding section.
5
141
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Rear wiper (Tourer)
B. rear wiper selection ring:
park,
intermittent wipe,
wash-wipe (set duration).
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear
wiper operates if the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Programming
The function is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle parameters menu.
This function is activated by default.
Windscreen and headlamp
wash
F Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards
you. The windscreen wash then the
windscreen wipers operate for a fixed
period.
The headlamp washers only operate when the
dipped or main beam headlamps are on,
with the vehicle moving.
If a significant accumulation of snow or
ice is present, or when using a tailgate
bicycle carrier, deactivate the automatic
rear wiper via the vehicle parameters
menu.
To reduce the consumption of the fluid by the
headlamp washers, they operate only with
every seventh use of the screenwash or every
25 miles (40 km) during a given journey.
142
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers
Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver by
moving stalk A to the "AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message in the
instrument panel screen.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver by
moving stalk A upwards and returning it to
position "0".
It is accompanied by a message in the
instrument panel screen.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the
wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver, if
rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of
the rainfall.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with
the sunshine sensor and located in the
centre of the windscreen behind the
rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic wiping when
using an automatic car wash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice
before activating the automatic wiping.
The automatic wiping must be
reactivated if the ignition has been off
for more than one minute, by pushing
stalk A downwards.
5
143
Lighting and visibility
C5_en_Chap05_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016
Special position of the windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the windscreen
wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
wiper blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
F Any action on the wiper stalk within one
minute after switching off the ignition
places the wiper blades vertically on the
screen.
F To park the wiper blades again, switch on
the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
Safety
144
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
General safety recommendations
Labels are applied at various
points on your vehicle. They carry
safety warnings as well as vehicle
identification information. Do not
remove them: they form an integral part
of your vehicle.
For any work on your vehicle, use
a qualified workshop that has the
technical information, skills and
equipment required, all of which a
CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
We draw your attention to the
following points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories not listed by
CITROËN may cause faults and
failures with the electrical system of
your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN
dealer for information on the range
of recommended accessories.
- As a safety measure, access to
the diagnostic socket, used for
the vehicle's electronic systems,
is reserved strictly for CITROËN
dealers or qualified workshops,
equipped with the special tools
required (risk of malfunctions of the
vehicle's electronic systems that
could cause breakdowns or serious
accidents). The manufacturer
cannot be held responsible if this
advice is not followed.
- Any modification or adaptation
not intended or authorised
by Automobiles CITROËN or
carried out without meeting the
technical requirements defined
by the manufacturer would lead
to the suspension of the legal and
contractual warranties.
Installation of accessory radio
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
transmitter, you must contact a
CITROËN dealer for the specification
of transmitters which can be fitted
(frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (2004/104/EC).
Depending on the legislation in force in
the country, certain safety equipment
may be compulsory: high visibility
safety vests, warning triangles,
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps
at the rear of the vehicle.
The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by CITROËN may result
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical
consumption.
Contact a CITROËN dealer
for information on the range of
recommended equipment and
accessories.
6
Safety
145
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Direction indicators
F Left: lower the lighting stalk beyond the
point of resistance.
F Right: raise the lighting stalk beyond the
point of resistance.
Three ashes of the direction
indicators
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of
resistance; the direction indicators will
flash 3 times.
Hazard warning
lamps
Visual warning with all of the direction
indicators flashing to alert other road users to a
vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
Automatic operation
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the rate of deceleration, the lamps come on
automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Selection of the left or right direction indicators
to signal a change of direction of the vehicle.
F Press this button, all of the direction
indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Safety
146
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Horn
Audible warning to alert other road users to
an imminent danger.
F Press the left or right-hand part of the fixed
centred controls steering wheel.
This system allows you to make an emergency
or assistance call to the emergency services or
to the dedicated CITROËN service.
Emergency or
assistance call
For more information on Audio and
telematics and in particular the
use of this equipment, refer to the
corresponding section.
6
Safety
147
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Braking assistance systems
Anti-lock braking system
and electronic brake force
distribution
Linked systems which improve the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking,
in particular on poor or slippery surfaces.
Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes into
operation automatically when there is a risk of
wheel lock.
Normal operation of the ABS may make itself
felt by slight vibration of the brake pedal.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the instrument
panel screen, it indicates a fault with
the anti-lock braking system which
could result in loss of control of the
vehicle when braking.
If this warning lamp comes on,
together with the STOP and ABS
warning lamps, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the
instrument panel screen, it indicates
a fault with the electronic brake force
distribution which could result in loss
of control of the vehicle when braking.
Emergency braking assistance
System which, in an emergency, enables you
to obtain the optimum braking pressure more
quickly, thus reducing the stopping distance.
Activation
It is triggered by the speed at which the brake
pedal is pressed.
The effect of this is a reduction in the
resistance of the pedal and an increase in
braking efficiency.
Group of supplementary systems which help
you to obtain optimum braking in complete
safety in emergency situations:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS),
- electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance (EBA).
When replacing wheels (tyres and
rims), ensure that they conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
When braking in an emergency, press
firmly without releasing the pressure.
When braking in an emergency,
press very firmly without releasing
the pressure.
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Safety
148
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Trajectory control systems
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) and dynamic stability
control (DSC)
Activation
This is indicated by flashing of this
warning lamp in the instrument panel.
Your vehicle has a system to improve traction
on snow: intelligent traction control.
This system detects situations of low adhesion
that might make moving off and progress
difficult on deep fresh snow or compacted
snow.
In these situations the intelligent traction
control system regulates the amount of wheel
slip to optimise the traction and trajectory
control of your vehicle.
For vehicles with Hydractive III + suspension,
manual adjustment of ground clearance to
the intermediate position improves further the
ability to make progress in deep snow (see the
relevant paragraph).
The anti-slip regulation (also known as traction
control) optimises traction to prevent skidding
of the wheels, by acting on the brakes of the
driving wheels and on the engine.
The electronic stability control acts on the
brake of one or more wheels and on the engine
to keep the vehicle on the trajectory required
by the driver, within the limits of the laws of
physics.
Intelligent traction control
system ("Snow motion")
These systems are activated automatically
each time the vehicle is started.
They come into operation in the event of a grip
or trajectory problem.
The use of snow tyres is strongly
recommended on surfaces with low
adhesion.
6
Safety
149
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Reactivation
Operating fault
Illumination of this warning lamp and
the lamp in the deactivation button,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message, indicate a fault with
the system.
Deactivation
Reactivate the systems as soon as the level of
grip permits.
F Press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
The DSC and ASR systems no longer act
on the operation of the engine and on the
brakes in the event of a involuntary change of
trajectory.
F Press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button
goes off.
The systems are reactivated automatically
each time the ignition is switched back on or
from 30 mph (50 km/h).
Below 30 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate
them manually:
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate
the DSC and ASR, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
Safety
150
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
The DSC and ASR systems offer increased safety in normal driving, but they should not
encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow, black ice) that the risk of loss of grip
increases. It is therefore important for your safety to keep the DSC and ASR systems
activated in all conditions, and particularly in difficult conditions.
The correct operation of these systems depends on observation of the manufacturer's
recommendations regarding as much the wheels (tyres and rims), braking and electronic
components as the assembly and repair procedures used by CITROËN dealers.
To benefit in full from the effectiveness of the DSC and ASR systems in wintry conditions,
the vehicle must be fitted with four snow tyres, allowing the vehicle to retain neutral
handling on the road.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
DSC/ASR
6
Safety
151
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Seat belts
Front seat belts
Fastening
F Pull the belt down in front of you in a steady
movement, making sure that it does not
become twisted.
F Press the fastening into its buckle.
F Check that it is properly secured and that
the automatic locking mechanism operates
correctly by pulling sharply on the belt
strap.
F The lap strap should be positioned as low
down as possible in the lap and as tight as
possible.
F The diagonal strap should be positioned
across the chest and away from the neck.
Each belt has a reel that adjusts its length
automatically to the girth of the seat occupant.
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioning system and force limiter.
This system improves safety in the front seats
in the event of a front impact.
Depending on the seriousness of the impact,
the pretensioning system instantly tightens the
seat belt against the body of the occupant.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt against the chest of the occupant,
so increasing his protection.
Height adjustment
When correctly adjusted, the seat belt shoulder
strap falls over the middle of the shoulder.
F To adjust the belt, squeeze the control and
slide it in the direction required.
Unfastening
F To unfasten the belt, press on the red
button in the buckle.
The belt retracts automatically when not in use.
Safety
152
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Rear seat belts
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
Each rear seat is fitted with a three-point inertia
reel seat belt with force limiter.
This display screen is located in the roof
console.
The seat belt fastened/unfastened status
for each seating position is indicated by the
lighting or flashing of the warning lamps linked
to each position.
A. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened/
unfastened warning lamp.
B. Front left-hand seat belt warning lamp.
C. Front right-hand seat belt warning lamp.
D. Rear right-hand seat belt warning lamp.
E. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
F. Rear left-hand seat belt warning lamp.
G. Front passenger's airbag deactivation
warning lamp.
H. Passenger's front airbag activation warning
lamp.
Seat belts and passenger's
front airbag warning lamp
display screen
6
Safety
153
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Advice
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affecting its performance.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
and a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
For more information on Child seats, refer to
the corresponding section.
In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's
seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with
the skills and equipment needed, which a
CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
particularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product, sold by
CITROËN dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
and reeled in correctly.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness
of the impact, the pretensioning device may
be deployed before and independently of the
airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners
is accompanied by a slight discharge of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The driver must ensure that passengers use
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
fastened before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as
they will not fulfill their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
permitting automatic adjustment of the length
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is
stowed automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
belt is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
locking device which comes into operation in
the event of a collision, emergency braking
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
the device by pulling the strap firmly and
then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
Safety
154
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Airbags
System designed to contribute towards
improving the safety of the occupants (with
the exception of the rear centre passenger)
in the event of a violent collision. The airbags
supplement the action of the force-limiting
seat belts.
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards best protecting the occupants of
the vehicle (with the exception of the rear
centre passenger); immediately after the
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that
they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the
occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in
certain roll-over conditions, the airbags
may not be deployed; the seat belt alone
contributes towards your protection in
these situations.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
The airbags do not operate when
the ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once.
If a second impact occurs (during
the same or a subsequent accident),
the deployment of airbag will not be
triggered again.
Deployment of one or more airbags
is accompanied by a slight emission
of smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight
irritation.
The noise of the detonation related to
the deployment of one or more airbags
may result in a slight loss of hearing for
a short time.
6
Safety
155
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Front airbags
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the
passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in the
event of a serious front impact to all or part of the
front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline
of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed
from the front to the rear of the vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the chest and
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
steering wheel, drivers side, and the dashboard,
passenger's side to cushion their forward
movement.
This warning lamp comes on in the
screen located in the roof console
when the ignition is on and until the
airbag is reactivated.
Deactivation
Only the front passenger's airbag can be
deactivated:
F with the ignition off, insert the key in the
passenger airbag deactivation switch 1,
F turn it to the "OFF" position,
F then, remove the key keeping the switch in
this position.
To assure the safety of your child, the
passenger's airbag must be deactivated
when you install a rearward facing child
seat on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Reactivation
When you remove a rearward facing child seat,
turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to reactivate
the airbag and so assure the safety of your
front passenger in the event of an impact.
System which contributes towards the
protection of the head and chest of the driver
and front passenger in the event of a front
impact.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
Safety
156
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Lateral airbags*
Deployment
It is deployed unilaterally in the event of a
serious side impact applied to all or part of
the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the
longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the corresponding door trim panel.
Operating fault
System which contributes towards the
protection of the driver and front passenger in
the event of a serious side impact, in order to
limit the risk of injury to the chest, between the
hip and shoulder.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front seat
backrest frame, on the outer side.
If this symbol appears in the
instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible warning
and a message, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay to have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in
the event of a serious impact.
If the symbol or warning lamp comes on
continuously, do not install a child seat
or an adult on the front passenger seat.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
If this warning lamp flashes, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
6
Safety
157
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Operating fault
If this symbol is displayed in
the instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to
have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in
the event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbags may not
be deployed.
No lateral airbag is deployed in the
event of a rear or front collision.
Curtain airbags*
System which contributes towards the
protection of the driver and passengers (with
the exception of the rear centre passenger) in
the event of a serious side impact, in order to
limit the risk of injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is fitted in the pillars and the
upper part of the passenger compartment.
Deployment
It is deployed at the same time as the
corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a
serious side impact to all or part of the side
impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the outside towards the
inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag improves protection for the
driver's knees in the event of a serious front
impact.
It is fitted in the dashboard below the steering
column.
Deployment
It is deployed at the same time as the driver's
front airbag.
Safety
158
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the safety recommendations below:
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its
spokes or resting your hands on the centre
part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the
dashboard.
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a
cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel
or hit it violently.
Do not fit or attach anything to the steering
wheel or dashboard, this could cause
injuries with deployment of the airbags.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment the lateral
airbags. For information on the range of seat
covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
contact a CITROËN dealer.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
backs (clothing...). This could cause injury
to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is
deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This
could cause injury to the head if the curtain
airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
grab handles installed on the roof, they play
a part in securing the curtain airbags.
Advice
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
object...), nor fix or attach anything close to
the inflation trajectory of the airbags; this
could cause injuries during their deployment.
Never modify the original definition of your
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
around the airbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
systems checked.
All work on the airbag system must be
carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
The vehicle's front door panels include side
impact sensors.
A damaged door or any unauthorised or
incorrectly executed work (modification or
repair) on the front doors or their interior trim
could compromise the operation of these
sensors - Risk of malfunction of the lateral
airbags!
Such work must only be done by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
6
Safety
159
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Although one of CITROËN's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
General points relating to child seats
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
* The regulations on carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
CITROËN recommends that children
should travel on the rear seats of your
vehicle:
- rearward facing up to the age of 3,
- forward facing over the age of 3.
- in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
Safety
160
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Child seat at the rear
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the rearward facing child seat does not
touch the vehicle's front seat.
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the forward
facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front
seat.
Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm contact with
the floor. If necessary, adjust the front
seat of the vehicle.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the protection
of the child in the event of an accident.
6
Safety
161
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Rearward facing Forward facing
Child seat in the front*
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that the support leg is in stable
contact with the floor. If necessary,
adjust the passenger seat.
* Refer to the current legislation in your country
before installing a child seat on this seat.
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat
to the intermediate longitudinal and highest
position, with the backrest straightened.
The passenger's front airbag must be
deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
to inflate.
When a forward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, adjust the
vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal
and highest position with seat backrest
straightened and leave the passenger's front
airbag activated.
Passenger seat adjusted to the intermediate
longitudinal and highest position.
Safety
162
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Passenger airbag OFF
The warning label present on both sides of the
passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In
line with current legislation, the following tables
contain this warning in all of the languages
required.
Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or
serious injury.
Only the passenger's front airbag can
be deactivated.
F With the ignition off, introduce
the key into the passenger airbag
deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the "OFF" position.
F Remove the key, leaving the switch
in this position.
When the ignition is on, this warning
lamp comes on in the instrument
panel and stays on while the airbag is
deactivated.
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag
This label is located on the middle door pillar,
passenger side.
6
AR
BG
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung,
das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja
avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a
gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
Safety
163
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
MT
Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
NO
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
Safety
164
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
6
Safety
165
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Child seats recommended by CITROËN
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rearward facing position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
CITROËN offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Safety
166
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Installing child seats secured using
the seat belt
Seat position(s)
Weight and indicative age of child
Up to 13 kg
(Groups 0 (b) and 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(Group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
From 15 to 25 kg
(Group 2)
From approx. 3 to 6 years
From 22 to 36 kg
(Group 3)
From approx. 6 to
10 years
Row 1
Front passenger (c) with
height adjustment (e)
U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)
Front passenger (c) without
height adjustment (e)
U U U U
Row 2
Outer rear (d) U U U U
Centre rear (d) (f) U U U U
In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of universally approved child seats (a) using a seat belt,
depending on the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.
6
Safety
167
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can
be installed in all vehicles using the seat
belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Shells and
"car cots" cannot be installed on the front
passenger seat.
(c) Consult the current legislation for your
country before driving with your child in this
seat.
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearward facing or forward facing, move
the front seat forward, then straighten the
backrest to allow enough space for the
child seat and the child's legs.
(e) When a rearward facing child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat, the
passenger airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the
airbag were deployed. When a forward
facing child seat is installed on the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag
must remain active.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with a
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
head restraint once the child seat has
been removed.
(f) A child seat with a support leg must never
be installed on the centre rear seat.
U: Seat position suitable for installation of
universally approved rearward facing and/
or forward facing child seat.
U (R): As U, with the vehicle seat, which
must be adjusted to the highest and
intermediate longitudinal position.
Safety
168
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Advice
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying children on the
front passenger seat is specific to each
country. Refer to the legislation in force in
your country.
Deactivate the passenger's front airbag
when a rearward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
CITROËN recommends the use of a booster
seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
guide at shoulder level.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's protection in
the event of an accident.
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt
buckle under the child seat, as this could
destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack
relative to the child's body to a minimum,
even for short journeys.
When installing a child seat using the seat
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
correctly on the child seat and that it secures
the child seat firmly on the seat of your
vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable,
move it forwards if necessary.
At rear seating positions, always leave
sufficient space between the front seat and:
- a rearward facing child seat,
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted
forward facing.
To do this, move the front seat forwards
and, if necessary, move its backrest into the
upright position.
For optimum installation of the forward facing
child seat, ensure that the back of the child
seat is as close as possible to the backrest
of the vehicle's seat, in contact if possible.
You must remove the head restraint before
installing a child seat with backrest to a
passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
attached securely to prevent it from being
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when
the child seat is removed.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- a child or children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors
and rear windows, use the child lock.
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of
the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
6
Safety
169
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance
with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
The outer rear seats are fitted with regulation
ISOFIX mountings.
There are three rings for each outer rear seat:
- two lower rings A, located between the
vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by
a marking,
- an upper ring B, called the TOP
TETHER, fixed to the rear shelf and
located under a cover behind the head
restraint behind the head restraint, for
fixing the upper strap.
It is indicated by a marking.
There are three rings for each outer rear seat:
- two lower rings A, located between the
vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by
a marking,
- an upper ring C, called the TOP TETHER,
fixed to the roof on the boot end and
located under a cover, for fixing the upper
strap.
It is indicated by a marking.
Saloon Tourer
Safety
170
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
To attach the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing a child seat on this seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
- pass the strap of the child seat centrally
between the head restraint rod apertures,
- raise the TOP TETHER cover, located on
the rear shelf (Saloon) or the roof (Tourer),
- secure the upper strap fixing to the ring B
or C,
- tighten the upper strap.
The TOP TETHER is used to secure the
upper strap of child seats that have one. This
arrangement limits the forward tipping of the
child seat in the event of a front impact.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
Observe strictly the fitting instructions
provided with the child seat.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in
your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with
two latches which are secured easily on the
two rings A, following installation of the guides
(supplied with the seat).
Some also have an upper strap which is
attached to the ring B or C.
For information on the possibilities for
installing ISOFIX child seats in your
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
6
Safety
171
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
ISOFIX child seat recommended by CITROËN and type
approved for your vehicle
RÖMER BabySafe Plus ISOFIX (size category E)
Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Installed in the rearward facing position using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A.
The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, that must be in contact with the floor of the vehicle.
This child seat can also be secured using a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and is
attached to the vehicle seat using the three-point sea belt.
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed in the forward facing position.
Fitted with an upper strap to be secured to the upper ring B or C,
referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three-point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
Safety
172
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Positions for tting ISOFIX child seats
IUF: Seat position suitable for installation of an Isofix Universal "Forward facing" seat attached
using the top tether.
IL-SU: Seat position suitable for installation of an ISOFIX Semi-Universal child seat, either:
- rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg
- forward facing fitted with a support leg,
- a shell fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
To attach the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" section.
Weight of child/Age given as a guide
Up to 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Up to 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size class F G C D E C D A B B1
ISOFIX universal and semi-universal
child seats can be installed on the outer
rear seats
IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
* The ISOFIX shell, fixed to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.
In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of ISOFIX child seats to seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mounting points.
For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defined by a letter from A to G, is shown on the child seat to the right of the
ISOFIX logo.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with a
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
head restraint once the child seat has
been removed.
6
Safety
173
C5_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Electric child lock
Activation
F Press button A.
The indicator lamp in button A comes on,
accompanied by a message in the instrument
panel screen.
Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls and use of
the rear electric windows.
The control is located on the driver's door, with the electric window controls.
Deactivation
F Press button A again.
The indicator lamp in button A goes off,
accompanied by a message in the instrument
panel screen.
This indicator lamp remains off until the child
lock is activated.
This system is independent and in no
circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
In the event of a serious impact,
the electric child lock is deactivated
automatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
Any other status of the indicator lamp
indicates a fault with the electric child
lock. Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Practical information
174
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
TOTAL & CITROËN
Partners in performance and
protecting the environment
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 years, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed
lubricants for CITROËN, to match the latest
technical innovations on CITROËN vehicles, both for
competition and for everyday motoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will obtain the
best performance from your engine.
Optimum protection for your
engine
By having your CITROËN vehicle
serviced with TOTAL lubricants, you are
contributing towards improving the life
and performance of your engine, while
also protecting the environment.
7
Practical information
175
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Fuel tank
Capacity of the tank: approximately 71 litres*.
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level in the
tank is reached, this warning
lamp comes on in the instrument
panel, accompanied by an
audible warning and a message
in the display screen. When it
first comes on, there remains
around 5 litres of fuel in the tank.
F Press at the top left corner, then pull on its
edge.
While you are refuelling, the engine must be
stopped and the ignition switched off.
F Turn the key a quarter turn to lock and
unlock the filler cap.
F When refuelling, place the cap on hook A.
F Fill the tank, but do not persist after the
third cut-off; this could cause your vehicle
to malfunction.
For a petrol engine with a catalytic
converter, the use of unleaded fuel is
compulsory.
The filler neck is narrower to ensure that only
unleaded petrol nozzles can be put in.
Opening the fuel flap
Refuelling
Additions of fuel must be of at least
5 litres to be taken into account by the
fuel gauge.
Opening the filler cap may create a
noise of an inrush of air. This vacuum,
which is entirely normal, is caused by
the sealing of the fuel system.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
system in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the key.
* 55 litres for Slovakia.
You must refuel to avoid running out of fuel.
Practical information
176
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with
bio-fuels that conform to current and future
European standards and can be obtained from
filling stations:
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with
biofuels that conform to current and future
European standards and can be obtained from
filling stations:
The only Diesel additives authorised for
use are those that meet the B715000
standard.
- Petrol that meets the EN228
standard, mixed with a bio-
fuel meeting the EN15376
standard.
The only petrol additives authorised for
use are those that meet the B715001
standard.
The use of any other type of (bio)
fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure
or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly
prohibited (risk of damage to the engine
and fuel system).
- Diesel fuel that meets
standard EN590 mixed with
a biofuel that meets standard
EN14214 (possibly containing
up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester),
- Diesel fuel that meets
standard EN16734 mixed with
a biofuel that meets standard
EN14214 (possibly containing
up to 10 % Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester),
- Paraffinic Diesel fuel that
meets standard EN15940
mixed with a biofuel that
meets standard EN14214
(possibly containing up to 7 %
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The use of B20 or B30 fuel
meeting standard EN16709
is possible in your Diesel
engine. However, this use,
even occasional, requires
strict application of the special
servicing conditions referred to as
"Arduous conditions".
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Travelling abroad
Certain fuels could damage the
engine of your vehicle. In certain
countries, the use of a particular fuel
may be required (specific octane
rating, specific sales name…) to
ensure correct operation of the
engine.
For any additional information, contact
your dealer.
7
Practical information
177
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)*
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of
engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
fill the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may
be different in other countries, the
presence of the misfuel prevention
device may make refuelling impossible.
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
misfuel protection, so before travelling
abroad, we recommend that you check
with the CITROËN dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the
fuel pumps in the country in which you
intend to travel.
Practical information
178
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only
to the front wheels. They must never
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force
in your country on the use of snow
chains and the maximum running speed
authorised.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow, to
avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and
the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted
with alloy wheels, check that no part of
the chain or its fixings is in contact with
the wheel rim.
Advice on installation
F If you have to fit the chains during a
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Chain specification
225/60 V16
Maximum link size:
9 mm
225/55 W17
245/45 W18
These tyres cannot
be fitted with chains
245/40 Y19
For more information on snow chains, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface.
7
Practical information
179
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Energy economy mode
System which manages the duration of use of
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
of charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can still use
functions such as the audio and telematics
system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam
headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a
maximum combined duration of about forty
minutes.
Switching to economy mode
A message appears in the instrument panel
screen indicating that the vehicle has switched
to economy mode and the active functions are
put on standby.
If a telephone call is being made at this
time, it will be maintained for around
10 minutes with the Bluetooth
®
hands-
free system of your audio system.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically
next time the vehicle is driven.
In order to restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately five minutes,
- for more than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for up to approximately
thirty minutes.
Let the engine run for the duration specified to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
engine in order to charge the battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine from
starting.
For more information on the
12 V battery, refer to the corresponding
section.
Practical information
180
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Towing a trailer
Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.
Side wind
F Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
When towing
We recommend the use of genuine
CITROËN towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
CITROËN dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to the
axle, and the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. Above
1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of
altitude.
For more information on Weights, refer
to the corresponding section.
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and the
driver must take particular care.
For more information on Driving
advice, particularly when towing, refer
to the corresponding section.
You must observe the maximum trailer
weight, indicated on the registration
certificate or in the technical
specification for your vehicle.
For more information on Weights (and
the towed loads which apply to your
vehicle) refer to the corresponding
section.
7
Practical information
181
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Blanking cover
When towing, you must remove the blanking
cover in the front bumper as well as the bonnet
seal if fitted.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for this.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
on the trailer and the headlamp beam
height of your vehicle.
For more information on Adjusting the
headlamps, refer to the corresponding section.
The rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically to avoid the
audible signal if a genuine CITROËN
towbar is used.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of
engine braking is recommended.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed.
The maximum towed load on a long incline
depends on the gradient and the exterior
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
temperature.
F If the warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come on,
stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine as soon as possible.
Practical information
182
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Roof bars
The design of your vehicle requires the use
of roof bars that are tested and approved by
CITROËN, for your safety and to avoid damage
to the roof and tailgate.
Regardless of the type of loading equipment
to be transported on the roof (bicycle carrier,
ski carrier...), it is imperative that you add
transverse roof bars. Any securing or lashing to
components other than the roof bars is strictly
prohibited.
Recommendations
F Distribute your load evenly, avoiding
overloading on one side.
F Arrange the heaviest part of the load as
close as possible to the roof.
F Anchor the load securely and draw
attention to it if any part of it is
overhanging.
F Drive gently, as the vehicle will be more
liable to the effects of side winds (vehicle
stability may be altered).
F Remove the roof bars as soon as they are
no longer needed.
Maximum load that can be distributed
on the roof bars (for a loading height
not exceeding 40 cm; except bicycle
carrier): 80 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt your
speed to the profile of the road to avoid
damaging the roof bars and the fixings
on the roof.
Please refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations
concerning the transportation of objects
which are longer than the vehicle.
7
Practical information
183
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Very cold climate protection*
HDi 160 Diesel engine
Normal position
The flap 2 is in a horizontal position in the air
duct 3.
Snow position
F Push and rotate the knob 1 by 90 ° in the
direction of the arrow in order to position
the flap 2 in a vertical position in the air
duct 3.
To return to the normal position, push the
knob 1 then rotate in the opposite direction.
It is essential to remove the very cold
protection when:
-
the exterior temperature exceeds 10 °C
.
-
driving at speeds of over 75 mph
(approximately 120 km/h).
Adjustable device which prevents the intake of snow particles, which could obstruct the air filter.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Practical information
184
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Cold climate screen*
Fitting
F Offer up the 2 sections of the snow guard
to the upper and lower sections of the front
bumper.
F Press on the surround to clip in one by one
the fixing clips.
Remove
F Using a screwdriver, lever each fixing clip
in turn to disengage them.
Before fitting
After fitting
Don't forget to remove the very cold climate
screen when:
- the exterior temperature exceeds
10 °C,
-
towing,
-
When driving at speeds of over 75 mph
(approximately 120 km/h).
Removable screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
* Depending on the country of sale.
7
Practical information
185
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Bonnet
Opening
F
At the front of the bonnet, lift the safety catch B and raise the bonnet.
F Unclip the stay C from its housing and pivot
it to insert it in the notch D indicated by a
yellow arrow.
F Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet
open.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support notch.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet then slam it firmly at the
end of its travel.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully
closed.
F Open the front left-hand door.
F Pull the interior bonnet release lever A,
located at the bottom of the door frame.
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from an automatic change to
START mode.
The location of the interior release lever
prevents opening of the bonnet while
the front left-hand door is closed.
This operation must only be carried out
when the vehicle is stationary.
Avoid opening the bonnet in strong
winds.
When the engine is hot, handle the
safety catch and bonnet stay with care
(risk of burns).
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, ...) be limited.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
be caught by the fan blades.
Practical information
186
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
The various caps and covers allow access for
checking fluid levels and for replacing certain
components.
THP
Petrol engines
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
or
or power steering and Hydractive III +
suspension fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Brake fluid reservoir.
7. Battery.
8. Air filter.
7
Practical information
187
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Diesel engines
HDi 160
BlueHDi 150 / BlueHDi 180
The various caps and covers allow access
for checking fluid levels, for replacing certain
components and for priming the fuel system.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
or
power steering and Hydractive III +
suspension fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
8. Battery.
The Diesel fuel system operates under
high pressure:
- Never carry out any work on this
system yourself.
- HDi engines make use of advanced
technology.
All maintenance and repairs require
specially trained staff, which only a
CITROËN dealer can provide.
Practical information
188
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Checking levels
Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles so equipped, or
using the dipstick.
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
If you find that the level is above the A mark or
below the B mark, do not start the engine.
- If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
- If the level is below the MIN mark, you
must top-up the engine oil.
Take care when working under the
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and
the cooling fan could start at any time
(even with the ignition off).
To ensure that the reading is correct, your
vehicle must be parked on a level surface
with the engine having been off for more than
30 minutes.
It is normal to top-up the oil level between
two services (or oil changes). CITROËN
recommends that you check the level, and top-
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
Checking using the dipstick
The location of the dipstick is shown in the
corresponding underbonnet layout view.
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
remove it completely.
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth.
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between the marks A
and B.
A = MAX
B = MIN
7
Practical information
189
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Oil grade
Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil,
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Topping-up the engine oil level
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the
corresponding underbonnet layout view.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture.
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
After topping-up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel
is not valid during the 30 minutes after
topping-up.
Engine oil change
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emission control system, never use
additives in the engine oil.
Practical information
190
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Brake fluid level
The brake fluid level should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check
the brake pad wear.
Changing the uid
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the interval for this operation.
Fluid specication
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Power steering or power
steering and suspension
fluid level
For topping up, it is necessary to go
to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Coolant level
The coolant level should be close
to the "MAX" mark but should never
exceed it.
Fluid specication
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The cooling fan may start after switching
off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might be caught by the fan
blades.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap
by two turns to allow the pressure to drop.
When the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top-up the level.
When the engine is warm, the temperature of
the coolant is regulated by the fan.
7
Practical information
191
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Diesel additive level
(Diesel engine with
particle filter)
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Used products
A low additive level is indicated by
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible warning
and a message in the instrument
panel screen.
Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, the low fluid level
is indicated by an audible signal and
a message in the screen.
Fluid specication
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing,
this fluid must not be topped up with or
replaced with plain water.
Reservoir capacity (depending on version).
- screenwash fluid: approximately 3.5 litres,
- screenwash and headlamp wash fluid:
approximately 6.15 litres.
Top up the reservoir when you next stop
the vehicle.
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop (France) or to an
authorised waste disposal site.
Practical information
192
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Checks
12 V battery
The battery does not require any
maintenance.
However, check regularly that the terminals are
correctly tightened (versions without quick release
terminals) and that the connections are clean.
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer's service schedule and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g.
city driving), replace them twice as often if
necessary.
A clogged passenger compartment filter may
have an adverse effect on the performance
of the air conditioning system and generate
undesirable odours.
Replace the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Oil filter
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the replacement interval for this
component.
Refer to the manufacturer's
service schedule for details of the
replacement intervals for these
components.
For more information and the precautions to
take before starting work on the 12 V battery,
refer to the corresponding section.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
specific technology and specification.
Its replacement should be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
7
Practical information
193
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for the checking interval for this component.
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for the checking interval for this component.
Particle filter system (Diesel)
Complementary to the catalytic converter,
this filter makes an active contribution to the
preservation of air quality by trapping unburnt
pollutant particles. Black exhaust fumes are
thus no longer emitted.
After prolonged idling or driving at very low
speeds, you may occasionally notice water
vapour being emitted from the exhaust when
accelerating. This is of no consequence to the
running of the vehicle or to the environment.
If there is risk of blockage, a message
appears in the instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible signal and
illumination of the service warning lamp.
This alert tells you that the particle filter
is approaching saturation (in conditions
of urban driving of exceptionally long
duration: low speeds, traffic jams etc.)
To regenerate the filter, it is advised to
drive as soon as possible, when traffic
conditions permit, at a speed of 40 mph
(around 60 km/h) or more for at least
five minutes (until the alert message
disappears).
If this alert persists, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Practical information
194
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to have
the condition of the brakes checked,
even between vehicle services.
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
Manual parking brake
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
units as important as those in the
braking system, CITROËN selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
on the brake discs and pads: braking
efficiency may be reduced. Make light
brake applications to dry and defrost
the brakes.
If a loss of effectiveness of this
system is noticed, the parking
brake must be checked, even
between two services.
Checking this system must be done by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Electric parking brake
This system does not require any
routine servicing. However, in the
event of a problem, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
For more information on the
Electric parking brake, refer to the
corresponding section.
7
Practical information
195
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
AdBlue
®
and SCR system
for BlueHDi Diesel engines
To assure respect for the environment and
conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions
standard, without adversely affecting the
performance or fuel consumption of Diesel
engines, CITROËN has taken the decision to
equip its vehicles with an effective system that
associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)
with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of
exhaust gases.
SCR system
Using a fluid called AdBlue
®
containing urea, a
catalytic converter turns up to 85% of nitrogen
oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are
harmless to health and the environment.
The AdBlue
®
is held in a special tank with
a capacity of about 17 litres: this provides
a driving range of about 12 500 miles
(20 000 km). An alert is triggered automatically
to warn you when the reserve level is
reached: you can then drive about 1 500 miles
(2 400 km) before the tank is empty.
During each scheduled service of your vehicle
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
the AdBlue
®
tank is refilled in order to allow
normal operation of the SCR system.
If the estimated mileage of your vehicle
between two services is greater than
12 500 miles (20 000 km), it will be necessary
to top-up the AdBlue
®
.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is empty, a
system required by regulations prevents
starting of the engine.
If the SCR system is faulty, the level
of emissions from your vehicle will no
longer meet the Euro 6 standard: your
vehicle becomes polluting.
In the event of a confirmed fault
with the SCR system, you must go
to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible: after
a running distance of 650 miles
(1 100 km), a system will be triggered
automatically to prevent engine starting.
In either case, a range indicator gives
you the distance you can travel before
the vehicle is immobilised.
Practical information
196
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
AdBlue
®
fluid range indicators
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is on reserve or after
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system, when the ignition is switched
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the
distance that can be covered, the range, before
engine starting is prevented.
In the event of simultaneous system fault and
low AdBlue
®
level, the shortest range figure is
the one displayed.
In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue
®
Range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
When the ignition is switched on, no
information on range is displayed automatically
in the instrument panel.
Pressing this button displays the driving range
temporarily.
Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not
specified.
The engine start prevention system
required by regulations is activated
automatically once the AdBlue
®
tank is
empty.
7
Practical information
197
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message
(e.g. "Top-up emissions additive: Starting
prevented in 900 miles") indicating the
remaining range expressed in miles or
kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
200 miles (300 km) until the fluid has been
topped-up.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
For more information on AdBlue
®
and the SCR
system, and in particular on topping-up the
AdBlue
®
, refer to the corresponding section.
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message
(e.g. "Top-up emissions additive: Starting
prevented in 350 miles") indicating the
remaining range expressed in miles or
kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds until the fluid has been topped-up.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
Otherwise you will not be able to restart your
engine.
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of the message "Top-up
emissions additive: Starting prevented".
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the system required
by regulations prevents engine starting.
To be able to start the engine,
we recommend that you call on
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for the top-up required.
If you carry out the top-up yourself, it
is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of
AdBlue
®
to the tank.
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km)
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
For more information on AdBlue
®
and the SCR
system, and in particular on topping-up the
AdBlue
®
, refer to the corresponding section.
Practical information
198
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system
These warning lamps come on, accompanied
by an audible signal and the display of the
message "Emissions fault".
The alert is triggered when driving when the
fault is detected for the first time, then when
switching on the ignition for subsequent
journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears during the next journey,
after self-diagnosis of the SCR system.
During an authorised driving phase (between
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
A system that prevents engine starting
is activated automatically from
650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation
of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system. Have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed
(after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the
permanent display of the message signalling
a fault), these warning lamps come on,
accompanied by an audible signal and the
display of a message (e.g.: "Emissions fault:
Starting prevented in 150 miles") indicating
the remaining range expressed in miles or
kilometres.
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists.
The alert is repeated when switching on the
ignition.
You should go to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your
engine.
7
Practical information
199
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Every time the ignition is switched on, these
warning lamps come on, accompanied by an
audible signal and the display of the message
"Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
You have exceeded the authorised
driving limit: the starting prevention
system inhibits engine starting.
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
AdBlue
®
freezes at temperatures below
around -11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater
for the AdBlue
®
tank, allowing you
to continue driving in all weather
conditions.
Starting prevented
To be able to start the engine, you must call on
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Practical information
200
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Precautions in use
AdBlue
®
is a urea-based solution. This liquid is
non-flammable, colourless and odourless (kept
in a cool area).
In the event of contact with the skin, wash
the affected area with soap and water. In the
event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate)
the eyes with large amounts of water or with
an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes.
If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get
medical attention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (high temperature, for
example), the risk of release of ammonia
cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid.
Ammonia vapour has an irritant effect on
mucous membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the reach of
children, in its original container or
bottle.
Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container: it would lose its purity.
Use only AdBlue
®
fluid that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
Never dilute AdBlue
®
with water.
Never pour AdBlue
®
into the Diesel fuel
tank.
The supply in a non-drip container or bottle
simplifies topping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre
(half a US gallon) bottles or 5 litre containers
from a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Never top-up from an AdBlue
®
dispenser reserved for heavy goods
vehicles.
Topping-up the AdBlue
®
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank is an operation
included in every routine service on your
vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it
may be necessary to top-up the fluid between
services, more particularly if an alert (warning
lamps and a message) signals the requirement.
You can go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If you envisage topping-up yourself, please
read the following warnings carefully.
7
Practical information
201
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Recommendations on storage
AdBlue
®
freezes at about -11°C and
deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended
that bottles be stored in a cool area and
protected from direct sunlight.
Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept
for at least a year.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it
has completely thawed out.
Never store bottles of AdBlue
®
in your
vehicle.
Procedure
Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure
that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level
surface.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
Access
F For access to the AdBlue
®
tank, raise the
boot carpet then, depending on equipment,
lift out the spare wheel and/or the storage
box.
Opening
F Without pressing, turn the black cap a
quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off.
F Turn the blue cap a 6
th
of a turn anti-
clockwise.
F Lift off the cap.
Practical information
202
C5_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Closing
F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it a
6
th
of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
F Refit the black cap and turn it a quarter of
a turn clockwise without pressing. Ensure
that the indicator on the cap lines up with
the indicator on the support.
F Depending on equipment, return the spare
wheel and/or the storage box to the bottom
of the boot.
F Refit the boot carpet and close the tailgate.
Important: in the event of a top-up
after a breakdown because of a lack
of AdBlue
®
, signalled by the message
"Top up emissions additive: Starting
prevented", you must wait around
5 minutes before switching on the ignition,
without opening the driver's door,
locking the vehicle or introducing the
key into the ignition switch.
Switch on the ignition, then, after
10 seconds, start the engine.
Do not dispose of AdBlue
®
bottles or
containers in the household waste.
Place them in a container provided for
this purpose or take them to your dealer.
If any fluid is split or splashed, wash
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off
using a sponge and hot water.
F Wipe away any spillage around the tank
filler using a damp cloth.
Important: if your vehicle's
AdBlue
®
tank is completely empty -
which is confirmed by the alert
messages and the impossibility of
starting the engine, you must add at
least 3.8 litres (so two 1.89 litre bottles).
Filling
F Pour the contents of the bottle into your
vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank.
8
In the event of a breakdown
203
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
HDi engines make use of advanced
technology.
For any work on your vehicle, contact
a qualified workshop that has the
skills and equipment required, which a
CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
BlueHDi engines
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
Priming the fuel system
HDi 160 engine
If you run out of fuel:
F after filling (minimum 5 litres) and removing
the protective cover to gain access to the
priming pump,
F operate the manual priming pump, until
some resistance is felt,
F operate the starter motor while depressing
the accelerator pedal slightly until the
engine starts.
If the engine fails to start at the first attempt,
wait fifteen seconds before trying again.
If the engine fails to start after a few attempts,
operate the priming pump again and then try to
start the engine.
When the engine is idling, accelerate slightly to
complete the bleeding of the circuit.
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
In the event of a breakdown
204
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Temporary puncture repair kit
Access to the kit
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the
boot floor.
This kit consists of a compressor and a sealant
cartridge.
It allows the temporary repair of a tyre.
You are then able to go to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures
which could affect the tyre, located on
the tyre tread or shoulder.
Its compressor can be used to check
and adjust the pressure of the tyre.
List of tools
These tools are specific to your vehicle and can
vary according to equipment. Do not use them
for other purposes.
1. 12 V compressor.
To temporarily repair a tyre using an
integral sealant cartridge and adjust the
tyre pressure.
2. Towing eye.
For more information on Towing, refer to the
corresponding section.
All versions*, except BlueHDi
Diesel
BlueHDi Diesel versions
* Depending on the country of sale.
8
In the event of a breakdown
205
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector.
B. On "I" / off "O" switch.
C. Deflation button.
D. Pressure gauge (in bars and psi).
E. Compartment housing a cable with an
adaptor for a 12 V socket.
F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair and inflation.
H. Speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker H must be
affixed to the vehicle's steering wheel to
remind you that a wheel is in temporary
use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on this
label.
In the event of a breakdown
206
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Repair procedure
1. Sealing
F Switch off the ignition.
F Turn the selector A to the
"sealant" position.
F Check that the switch B is in
position "O".
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated into the tyre.
F Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
F Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.
F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.
Take care, this product is harmful if
swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
Do not start the compressor before
connecting the white pipe to the tyre
valve: the sealant product would be
expelled through the pipe.
8
In the event of a breakdown
207
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
F Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
The sealant is injected into the tyre under
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from
the valve during this operation (risk of
splashing).
F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle
with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
F Drive immediately for approximately
three miles (five kilometres), at reduced
speed (between 12 and 37 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
In the event of a breakdown
208
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
2. Ination
F Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
F Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
F Connect the white pipe to the tyre valve.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
As soon as possible, go to a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must inform the technician that you
have used this kit. After inspection, the
technician will advise you on whether
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
replaced.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C), in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the left-
hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully plugged;
contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshop for assistance.
F Remove and stow the kit.
F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
8
In the event of a breakdown
209
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Removing the pipe and cartridge
F Turn the pipe assembly 2 to the left until it
contacts the unit.
F Disconnect the union 1 from the cartridge
by turning it a quarter turn anti-clockwise.
F Extract the pipe assembly 2, then
disconnect the union 3 from the air delivery
pipe by turning it a quarter turn anti-
clockwise.
Beware of discharges of fluid.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed for
single use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to an
authorised waste disposal site or a
CITROËN dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from CITROËN
dealers or from a qualified workshop.
F Remove the pipe assembly 2.
F Support the compressor vertically.
F Unscrew the cartridge 4 from the bottom.
To fit the new cartridge and new pipe, carry out
these operations in reverse order.
In the event of a breakdown
210
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Checking / adjusting tyre pressures
You can also use the compressor without
injecting any product, to check and if necessary
adjust your tyre pressures.
F Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
F Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
F Connect the pipe to the tyre valve.
F Connect the compressor's electrical
connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I";
to deflate: switch B in position "O" and
press button C), according to the vehicle's
tyre pressure label.
F Remove the kit then stow it.
8
In the event of a breakdown
211
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Changing a wheel
Access to the tools
For vehicles supplied with a standard spare
wheel (same size as the four wheels), the tools
are stowed in a carrier, located in the spare
wheel.
F Release the retaining strap for access to it.
List of tools
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle
and may vary according to equipment. Do not
use them for any other purpose.
1. Wheelbrace.
Used for removing the wheel trim and the
wheel fixing bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle.
Used to raise the vehicle.
3. Bolt head finisher tool.
Used to remove the wheel bolt protectors
(finishers) on wheel bolts with alloy wheels.
4. Wheel chock*.
5. Towing eye.
Do not use:
- the jack for any purpose other than
lifting the vehicle,
- a different jack from the one
supplied with the vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original
jack, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop to obtain the one
listed by the manufacturer.
For more information on Towing the
vehicle, refer to the corresponding
section.
* Depending on country of sale.
For vehicles supplied with a "space-saver"
type spare wheel, the tools are stowed in a
storage well, located below the spare wheel.
F Unscrew the central yellow screw and
remove the wheel for access to it.
In the event of a breakdown
212
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Access to the spare wheel
Removing the boot oor
F Saloon: raise the boot floor and fold in two.
F Tourer: raise the boot floor and hook it
using the retractable handle. Secure the
hook to the top part of the boot.
Removing the standard spare
wheel
F Detach the strap, then push the wheel
forwards so as to be able to lift it.
Repositioning the standard spare
wheel
F Position the spare wheel flat in the boot,
then pull it towards you.
F Next place the toolbox inside the wheel,
then secure the assembly using the strap.
Removing the "space-saver"
spare wheel
F Unscrew the central nut.
F Remove the fixing parts (nut and bolt).
F Take the spare wheel from the rear and lift
it towards you.
F Remove the wheel from the boot.
8
In the event of a breakdown
213
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
The tyre pressures are indicated on the
label located on the left-hand centre
door pillar.
Tyre pressures are given on this label
for different vehicle loading conditions.
Repositioning the "space-saver"
spare wheel
F Return the spare wheel to its housing
above the toolbox.
F Unscrew the nut on the bolt by a few turns.
F Place the fixing parts (nut and bolt) in the
middle of the wheel.
F Tighten the central nut until it clicks to
secure the wheel.
Repositioning the boot oor
F Release the boot floor to return it to its
initial position.
In the event of a breakdown
214
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Removing a wheel
F Park the vehicle on stable, firm ground that
is not slippery. Apply the parking brake.
F If your vehicle is equipped with
"Hydractive III+" suspension, with the
engine running at idle, adjust the ground
clearance to its maximum height.
F Switch off the ignition and engage first gear
(position P for an automatic gearbox).
F If your vehicle is fitted with "Hydractive III+"
suspension, position the chock, whichever
direction the gradient may be in, in front of
the front wheel diametrically opposite to
the one to be replaced.
List of operations
F Remove the protector from each bolt using
tool 3.
F Fit the security bolt socket to the
wheelbrace to slacken the security bolt
(depending on equipment).
F Slacken the other bolts using just the
wheelbrace 1.
Before positioning the jack:
F Always adjust the vehicle’s ground
clearance to the "maximum height"
position and retain this adjustment
for as long as the jack is under the
vehicle (do not use the hydraulic
adjustments),
F Ensure that any passengers have
left the vehicle and are in a safe
place.
Never go underneath the vehicle if it is
supported only by the jack.
The jack and all of the tools are specific
to your vehicle. Do not use them for any
other purposes.
Have the original wheel repaired and
refitted as soon as possible.
8
In the event of a breakdown
215
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
F Position the foot of the jack 2 on the
ground, ensuring that it is directly below the
front A or rear B jacking point provided on
the underbody, closest to the wheel to be
changed.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack
may slip or drop - Risk of injury!
Ensure that the jack is positioned only
at one of the jacking points provided
under the vehicle, making sure that the
vehicle's contact area is centred on the
head of the jack. Otherwise there is a
risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of
the jack dropping - Risk of injury!
F Extend the jack 2 until its head comes into
contact with the jacking point A or B used;
the contact area A or B on the vehicle must
be correctly inserted into the central part of
the head of the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to easily fit the spare (non punctured)
wheel.
F Remove the bolts and stow them in a clean
place.
F Remove the wheel.
In the event of a breakdown
216
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
List of operations
Fitting a wheelWheel for temporary use
Your vehicle may be fitted with a spare wheel
which is different to those on the vehicle. When
fitting the spare wheel, it is normal to notice
that the wheel bolt washers do not come into
contact with the wheel rim. The spare wheel is
secured by the conical tapering of the wheel
bolt’s shaft.
When refitting the original wheel, ensure that
the wheel bolt contact surfaces are clean and
in good condition.
F Lower the vehicle to the ground.
F Lower the jack 2 and remove it.
F Fit the wheel on the hub.
F Fit and tighten the bolts by hand.
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security bolt
socket (depending on equipment).
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using just the
wheelbrace 1.
8
In the event of a breakdown
217
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
If your vehicle is fitted with a spare
wheel of a different size to those on the
vehicle, you must not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) whilst using the spare wheel.
The wheel bolts are specific to the type
of wheel.
If the type of wheel is changed,
check with your CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop that the wheel bolts
are compatible with the new wheels.
Take care to note down the code
number engraved on the head of the
security bolt socket. This will enable
you to obtain a replacement security
bolt socket from your dealer.
F Tighten the security bolt using
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security bolt
socket (depending on equipment).
F Tighten the other bolts using just the
wheelbrace 1.
F Refit the protectors on the bolts (depending
on equipment).
F Stow the tools in the carrier box.
F Return the suspension to the normal
position.
F Check that the tyre pressure is correct and
have the balancing checked.
Tyre under-ination detection
The space-saver type or steel spare
wheel does not have a sensor.
The punctured wheel must be repaired
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In the event of a breakdown
218
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Changing a bulb
Front lamps
Model with Xenon headlamps (D1S)
1. Dual-function Xenon headlamps
(dipped/main): D1S
2. Cornering lighting: HP19
3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps:
LEDs
For the maintenance of the front lamps and
changing HP19 and D1S bulbs and LED lamps,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs must be replaced by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
You are advised to change both D1S
bulbs at the same time, if one of them
has failed.
The headlamps have polycarbonate
lenses with a protective coating:
F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or
a pH neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
Changing a bulb should only be done
after the headlamp has been switched
off for several minutes (risk of serious
burns).
F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid
damaging the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
8
In the event of a breakdown
219
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Dipped beam headlamps
F Remove the protective cap B.
F Disconnect the connector by pressing it
between the thumb and index finger.
F Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.
F Take out the bulb.
F Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial
force.
F Refit the connector, until it is all the way in.
F Refit the protective cap B.
Main beam headlamps
F Remove the protective cap A.
F Disengage the retaining spring.
F Remove the bulb and replace it, paying
attention to the direction of fitting.
F Refit the retaining spring.
F Refit the protective cap A.
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Main beams: H1
2. Dipped beams: H7
3. Directional lighting: H7
4. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps:
LEDs
For the maintenance of the front lamps and
changing LED lamps, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
In the event of a breakdown
220
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Directional lamp
F Remove the protective cap C.
F Disconnect the connector by pressing it
between the thumb and index finger.
F Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.
F Take out the bulb.
F Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial
force.
F Refit the connector, until it is all the way in.
F Refit the protective cap C.
Direction indicators
F Refit the connector (push the grey tongue
in well).
F Refit the headlamp unit in the bumper.
F Refit the lamp screws.
F Position the cover using its guides and refit
the screws.
Bulbs: HP24
F Remove the fixing screw of cover A using a
torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.
F Remove the fixing screw of lamp B using
a torx tool, then pull the lamp to remove it
from the bumper.
F Detach the bulb C by pressing on bars 1
and 2.
F Disconnect the connector (pull whilst
pressing on the grey tongue using a flat
screwdriver).
F Replace the bulb.
8
In the event of a breakdown
221
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Side repeaters
The side repeater is sealed.
If the bulb is faulty, replace the side repeater.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Front foglamps
F Disconnect the connector D.
F Remove the bulb by performing a quarter
of a turn.
F Replace the bulb.
F Refit the connector D.
F Refit the headlamp unit in the bumper.
F Refit the lamp screws.
F Position the cover using its guides and refit
the screws.
When refitting, take care not to trap
the electrical wiring.
Bulbs: H8
F Remove the fixing screw of cover A using a
torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.
F Remove the fixing screw of lamp B using a
torx tool, then pull on the lamp to remove it
from the bumper.
In the event of a breakdown
222
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Rear lamps (Saloon)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: P21W/5W
2. Sidelamps: R5W
3. Reversing lamps: H21W
4. Foglamps: H21W
5. Direction indicators: PY21W
Boot lid-mounted lamps
F Refit the bulb holder H.
F Check that the bulb holder H is secured
correctly by the two clips E.
F Refit the connector G.
F Replace and fix the trim F with its 3 clips.
F Open the boot.
F Using a flat screwdriver, remove the 3 clips
which fix the trim in the lamp area.
F Partially remove the trim F.
F Disconnect the connector G.
F Unclip the bulb holder H.
F Replace the failed bulb.
8
In the event of a breakdown
223
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Wing-mounted lamps
F Remove the lateral boot trim flap A. To do
so, pull it towards the inside of the boot,
then pull it upwards.
F Disconnect connector B.
F Unscrew the 2 fixings C.
F Remove the lamp from its housing.
F Detach the bulb holder D.
F Replace the failed bulb.
F Refit the bulb holder D.
F Place the lamp in its housing.
F Screw in the 2 fixings C.
F Refit connector B.
F Refit the side boot trim A.
For vehicles fitted with a Hi-Fi amplifier, on the
right-hand side slacken the screw by a quarter
turn, then pull the boot side trim A up.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw or
unscrew the fixings C.
In the event of a breakdown
224
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Tailgate-mounted lamps
Rear lamps (Tourer)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: P21W/5W
2. Sidelamps: R5W
3. Reversing lamps: H21W
4. Foglamps: H21W
5. Direction indicators: PY21W
F Refit the bulb holder H ensuring that it is
correctly clipped in place.
F Position the lamp in its housing.
F Tighten the fixing nut G.
F Refit the connector F.
F Position and clip in place the plastic
cover E.
F Open the boot.
F Using a flat screwdriver, remove the plastic
cover E.
F Disconnect the connector F.
F Unscrew the fixing nut G.
F Disengage the lamp from its housing.
F Unclip the bulb holder H.
F Replace the failed bulb.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw or
unscrew the fixing nut G.
8
In the event of a breakdown
225
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Wing-mounted lamps
F Pull away the flap in the boot side trim A.
To do this, pull it towards the middle of the
boot, then pull it up.
F Disconnect the connector B.
F Unscrew the fixing nut C.
F Remove the lamp from its housing.
F Detach the bulb holder D.
F Replace the faulty bulb.
F Refit the bulb holder D.
F Place the lamp in its housing.
F Screw in the fixing nut C.
F Refit the connector B.
F Refit the side boot trim A.
For vehicles fitted with a Hi-Fi amplifier, on the
right-hand side slacken the screw by a quarter
turn, then pull the boot side trim A up.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw or
unscrew the fixing nut C.
In the event of a breakdown
226
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the
external holes of the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip it.
Third brake lamp (LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of light emitting
diode lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Remove the lens.
F Change the faulty bulb.
Number plate lamps (W5W)
8
In the event of a breakdown
227
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Interior lamps
Courtesy lamps
Bulb: W5W
F Unclip the transparent cover of the roof
lamp to reach the bulb.
Rear reading lamps (Tourer)
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the cover of the reading lamp to
access the bulb.
Map reading lamps
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the cover.
F If necessary, detach the partition of the
affected map reading lamp.
Boot lamp
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to the
bulb.
In the event of a breakdown
228
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Door aperture lamps
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to
the bulb.
Footwell lighting
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to
the bulb.
Glove box
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to
the bulb.
8
In the event of a breakdown
229
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Changing a fuse
The 2 fuseboxes are located below the dashboard and under the bonnet.
Replacing a fuse
Before replacing a fuse, you must:
- ascertain the cause of the fault and have it
remedied,
- switch off all electrical consumers,
- park the vehicle and switch off the ignition,
- identify the failed fuse using the allocation
tables and diagrams presented on the
following pages.
Good Failed
Tweezer
If the fault recurs soon after replacing the
fuse, have the electrical system checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
When replacing a fuse, it is essential to:
- use the special tweezer, located on the
cover close to the fusebox, to extract
the fuse from its housing and check the
condition of its filament,
- always replace a failed fuse with one of
equivalent rating (same colour); using a
different rating could cause a malfunction
(risk of fire).
The replacement of a fuse not
mentioned in the tables below may
cause a serious malfunction on your
vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
CITROËN will not accept any
responsibility for the costs incurred
in repairing your vehicle or for the
malfunctions resulting from the
installation of auxiliary accessories
which were not supplied or
recommended by CITROËN and which
were not installed in accordance with
its instructions, in particular where
the current consumption of all of
the additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamps.
Installation of electrical
accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In the event of a breakdown
230
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Fuses under the dashboard
Access to the fuses
F Fully open the storage box then pull firmly
on it horizontally,
F Remove the trim by pulling sharply on the
bottom.
Fusebox C
Fusebox A
Tweezer
When refitting the storage box, observe the
following advice:
- with the storage box horizontal, refit the
bottom ensuring that the lower cut-outs are
in line with the pins,
- give a sharp push to the front,
- close the storage box, ensuring that the
springs located behind pass over the top.
Fusebox B
8
In the event of a breakdown
231
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Fusebox A
Fusebox B
Fuse N° Rating Function
G29 - Not used
G30 5 A Heated door mirrors
G31 5 A Rain and sunshine sensor
G32 5 A Seat belt not fastened warning lamps
G33 5 A Electrochrome mirrors
G34 20 A Sunroof (Saloon)
G35 5 A Passenger door lighting - Passenger door mirror adjustment
G36 30 A Electric tailgate (Tourer)
G37 20 A Heated front seats
G38 30 A Driver’s electric seat
G39 30 A Passenger’s electric seat - Hi-Fi amplifier
G40 3 A Trailer relay unit supply
Fuse N° Rating Function
G36 15 A 6-speed automatic gearbox
G37 10 A Daytime running lamps - Diagnostic socket
G38 3 A DSC/ASR
G39 10 A Hydraulic suspension
G40 3 A STOP switch
In the event of a breakdown
232
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Fusebox C
Fuse N° Rating Function
F1 15 A Rear screen wipe (Tourer)
F2 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay
F3 5 A Airbags
F4 10 A Automatic gearbox - Additional heater unit (Diesel) - Electrochrome rear view mirrors
F5 30 A Front windows - Sun roof - Passenger door lighting - Passenger door mirror adjustment
F6 30 A Rear windows
F7 5 A Vanity mirror lighting - Glove box lighting - Interior lamps - Torch (Tourer)
F8 20 A Audio system - Steering mounted controls - Screen - Under-inflation detection - Electric boot ECU
F9 30 A Cigarette lighter - Front 12 V socket
F10 15 A Alarm - Steering mounted controls, lighting, signalling and wiper stalks
F11 15 A Low current anti-theft switch
F12 15 A Driver’s electric seat - Instrument panel - Seat belt not fastened warning lamps - Air conditioning controls
F13 5 A Engine relay unit - Hydraulic suspension pump cut-off relay - Airbags ECU supply
F14 15 A
Rain and sunshine sensor - Parking sensors - Passenger’s electric seat - Trailer relay unit - Hi-Fi amplifier ECU -
Hands-free kit - Lane Departure Warning System
F15 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay
F17 40 A Heated rear screen - Heated door mirrors
FSH SHUNT PARK SHUNT
8
In the event of a breakdown
233
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Fuses under the bonnet
Access to the fuses
F Undo each screw by a quarter turn.
F Remove the cover.
F Change the fuse.
Fuse N° Rating Function
F1 20 A Engine control unit
F2 15 A Horn
F3 10 A Screen wash pump
F4 10 A Headlamp wash pump
F5 15 A Engine actuators
F6 10 A Air flow meter - Directional headlamps - Diagnostic socket
F7 10 A Automatic gearbox selector lever lock - Power steering
F8 25 A Starter motor
F9 10 A Clutch switch - STOP switch
F10 30 A Engine actuators
F11 40 A Air conditioning blower
F12 30 A Wipers
F13 40 A BSI supply (ignition positive)
F14 30 A -
F15 10 A Right-hand main beam
F16 10 A Left-hand main beam
F17 15 A Right-hand dipped beam
F18 15 A Left-hand dipped beam
F19 15 A Engine actuators
F20 10 A Engine actuators
F21 5 A Engine actuators
After a repair, take care to close the
cover correctly to ensure that it is
sealed correctly.
Any repairs on the maxi-fuses (that
give additional protection) located
in the fuseboxes, must be left to a
CITROËN or a qualified workshop.
Table of fuses
In the event of a breakdown
234
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Function
F6 25 A Rear 12 V socket (max power: 100 W)
F7 15 A Foglamps
F8 20 A Additional burner (Diesel)
F9 30 A Electric parking brake
8
In the event of a breakdown
235
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
12 V battery
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
For access to the (+) terminal:
F release the bonnet using the interior lever,
then the exterior safety catch,
F raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources
of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
explosion or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.
If your vehicle has an automatic
gearbox, do not try to start the engine
by pushing the vehicle.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
specific technology and specification.
Its replacement should be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
General points
Batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead.
They must be disposed of in
accordance with regulations and must
not, in any circumstances, be discarded
with household waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection
point.
Lead-acid starter batteries
(+) Positive terminal.
It has a quick-release clamp.
(-) Negative terminal.
As the battery negative terminal is not
accessible, a remote earth point is located
close to the battery.
In the event of a breakdown
236
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Starting using another battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables or a battery booster.
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
good battery and leave it running for a few
minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few
moments before trying again.
Never try to start the engine by
connecting a battery charger.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
booster.
First check that the slave battery has a
nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.
The two vehicles must not be in contact
with each other.
Switch off the electrical consumers on
both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
lighting, ...).
Ensure that the jump lead cables do
not pass close to moving parts of the
engine (cooling fan, belts, ...).
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
the engine is running.
Some functions, including Stop & Start,
are not available if the battery is not
sufficiently charged.
F Raise the plastic cover on the (+) terminal,
if your vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the flat battery A (at
the metal elbow) then to the positive
terminal (+) of the slave battery B or the
booster.
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
slave battery B or the booster (or earth
point on the other vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the earth point C on the broken
down vehicle.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then
disconnect the jump lead cables in the
reverse order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least
30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle
stationary, so that the battery reaches an
adequate state of charge.
8
In the event of a breakdown
237
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Charging the battery using a battery charger
For optimum service life of the battery, it is
essential to maintain an adequate state of
charge.
In some circumstances it may be necessary to
charge the battery:
- if you use your vehicle essentially for short
journeys,
- if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If you envisage charging your vehicle's
battery yourself, use only a charger
compatible with lead-acid batteries of a
nominal voltage of 12 V.
Never try to charge a frozen battery.
If the battery has been frozen, have
it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop, who will check that
the internal components have not been
damaged and the casing is not cracked,
which could cause a leak of toxic and
corrosive acid.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
Follow the instructions for use provided
by the manufacturer of the charger.
Never reverse polarities.
If this label is present, it is essential
to use only a 12 V charger, to avoid
causing irreversible damage to the
electrical components related to the
Stop & Start system.
F Switch off the ignition.
F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, ...).
F Switch off the charger B before connecting
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.
F Ensure that the charger cables are in good
condition.
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has
one, on the (+) terminal.
F Connect the charger B cables as follows:
- the positive (+) red cable to the (+)
terminal of the battery A,
- the negative (-) black cable to the earth
point C on the vehicle.
F At the end of the charging operation, switch
off the charger B before disconnecting the
cables from the battery A.
In the event of a breakdown
238
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B.
F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off.
Quick-release terminal clamp*
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
F Raise the lever A fully.
F Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal.
F Push the clamp B fully down.
F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B.
Do not force the lever as locking will
not be possible if the clamp is not
positioned correctly; start the procedure
again.
Disconnecting the battery
In order to maintain an adequate state
of charge for starting the engine, it is
recommended that the battery be disconnected
if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long
period.
Before disconnecting the battery:
F close all openings (doors, boot, windows),
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting, ...),
F switch off the ignition and wait for
four minutes.
Having exposed the battery, it is only
necessary to disconnect the (+) terminal.
Following reconnection of the
battery
After reconnecting the battery, switch on the
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the
engine to allow initialisation of the electronic
systems.
However, if minor problems persist following
this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must yourself reinitialise or reset certain
systems, such as:
- the remote control,
- the electric windows,
- the panoramic sunroof blind,
- the date and time in the audio system,
- the radio preset stations.
The Stop & Start system may not be
operational during the trip following the
first engine start.
In this case, the system will only be
available again after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
a period which depends on the ambient
temperature and the state of charge of
the battery (up to about 8 hours).
* Depending on version.
8
In the event of a breakdown
239
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
Towing the vehicle
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
The towing eye is installed in the jack box
placed in the spare wheel.
For access to it:
F open the boot,
F raise the floor,
F remove the towing eye from the jack box.
Access to the tools
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing
arm; rope and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for
braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release
the parking brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the ground,
- where there is no approved towing arm available...
In the event of a breakdown
240
C5_en_Chap08_en-cas-de-panne_ed01-2016
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
levering at the bottom with the flat end of
the towing eye.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Attach a towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Towing your vehicle
Failure to observe this advice could
result in damage to certain braking
components and the absence of
braking assistance the next time the
engine is started.
In the event of a problem or malfunction
with the automatic gearbox, the
vehicle can be immobilised with a gear
engaged. In this case, the front of the
vehicle must be lifted for towing.
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover:
● by pressing at the bottom,
● then by levering at the top using the flat
end of the towing eye.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Attach a towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Towing another vehicle
F Place the gear lever in neutral (position N
with an automatic gearbox).
9
Technical data
241
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Engines and gearboxes
Petrol engine
THP 160
THP 150
Gearbox Automatic (6-speed)
Model code:
RD... RW...
5FM-A
5FE-A/D**
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8
EU standard maximum power (kW)* / hp DIN 120 / 110**
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 6 000
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 240
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 1 400
Fuel Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres) (with filter
replacement)
4.25
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (directive 1999/99/EC).
** In Russia, the maximum power is 110 kW and in Brazil, the maximum power is 120 kW.
RD...: Saloon.
RW...: Tourer.
Technical data
242
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Weights and towed loads (in kg)
Petrol engine
THP 160
THP 150
Gearbox Automatic (6-speed)
Model code
RD 5FM-A
RD 5FE-A/D
RW 5FM-A
RW 5FE-A/D
Body Saloon Tourer
Unladen weight 1 515 1 534
Kerb weight 1 590 1 609
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 026 2 200
Gross train weight (GTW) 2 526 2 700
Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
- on a 10% or 12% slope
500 500
Braked trailer* (with load transfer within GTW
limit)
710 790
Unbraked trailer 500 500
Recommended nose weight 69 74
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised speed is reduced when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the exterior temperature is
higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same
amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
9
Technical data
243
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
RD...: Saloon.
RW...: Tourer.
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation
(directive 1999/99/EC).
Engines and gearboxes
Diesel engine BlueHDi 150 S&S BlueHDi 180 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code:
RD... RW...
AHR-M/S AHW-T/S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 88
EU standard maximum power (kW)* 110 133
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 750
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 370 400
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
Particle filter (FAP) Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres) (with filter
replacement)
5.1 5.1
.../S: model fitted with Stop & Start.
Technical data
244
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Diesel engine BlueHDi 150 S&S BlueHDi 180 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code RD AHR-M/S RW AHR-M/S RD AHW-T/S RW AHW-T/S
Body Saloon Tourer Saloon Tourer
Unladen weight 1 540 1 575 1 620 1 655
Kerb weight 1 615 1 650 1 695 1 730
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 160 2 235 2 190 2 290
Gross train weight (GTW) 3 660 3 635 3 290 3 290
Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
- on a 10% or 12% slope
1 500 1 400 1 100 1 000
Braked trailer* (with load transfer within GTW
limit)
1 750 1 650 1 350 1 250
Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750
Recommended nose weight 73 67 57 51
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised speed is reduced when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the exterior temperature is
higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same
amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Weights and towed loads (in kg)
9
Technical data
245
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Dimensions (in mm)
Exterior (Saloon)
A 2 815
B 1 054
C 910
D 4 779
E 1 586
F 2 096
G 1 557
H 1 860
I*
1 451
1 458**
* Without roof bars.
** With metal spring suspension.
Technical data
246
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Interior (Saloon)
A 1 030
B 1 115
C 566
D 504
E 1 040
F 1 705
9
Technical data
247
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Exterior (Tourer)
A 2 815
B
1 054
1 065***
C 959
D
4 829
4 840***
E 1 586
F 2 096
G 1 557
H 1 860
I*
1 479
1 483**
* Without roof bars.
** With metal spring suspension.
*** Tourer XTR version.
9
Technical data
249
C5_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Identication markings
Various visible markings for identification of the vehicle.
Refer also to the registration document for your vehicle for the vehicle type, serial number, weights...
All genuine CITROËN replacement parts are available exclusively within the dealer network.
For your safety and in order to remain within the terms of the warranty, you are advised to use only
CITROËN replacement parts.
D. Tyre / paint label
Affixed to the left-hand centre door pillar, it
bears the following information:
- Tyre pressures, laden and unladen.
- Tyre sizes (including the load index and
speed rating).
- Tyre pressure for the spare wheel.
- Paint colour code.
Observe the tyre pressures indicated by
CITROËN.
Check the tyre pressures at least
monthly, when cold.
A. Manufacturer's label
- Gross train weight (GTW).
- Maximum weight on front axle.
- Maximum weight on rear axle.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
under the bonnet
C. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at
the bottom of the windscreen aperture
Low tyre pressures increase the fuel
consumption of your vehicle.
Affixed to the left-hand centre door pillar, it
bears the following information:
- Manufacturer's name.
- EU type approval number.
- Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW).
The original tyres fitted to the vehicle
may have a load index or speed rating
higher than those given on the label;
this has no effect on the inflation
pressures.
Audio and Telematics
250
C5_en_Chap10a_BTA_ed01-2016
Emergency or assistance call
Localised Emergency Call
In an emergency, press this
button for more than 2 seconds.
Flashing of the green indicator
lamp and a voice message
confirm that the call has
been made to the "Localised
Emergency Call"* centre.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the call.
The green indicator lamp goes off.
The green indicator lamp remains on (without
flashing) when communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
Localised Emergency Call immediately locates
your vehicle, makes contact with you in your
language** and - if necessary - organises
sending of the appropriate emergency
services**. In countries where the service is not
operational, or if the locating service has been
expressly declined, the call is directed straight
to the emergency services (112) without
location.
** Depending on the geographic cover for
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered by Telematic
services is available at dealers or
at www.citroen.co.uk.
* Depending on the terms and conditions for
the service, available from dealers, and
technological and technical limits.
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, and independently of
the deployment of any airbags, an
emergency call is made automatically.
If you benefit from the CITROËN
Connect Box offer with the SOS and
assistance pack included, there are
additional services available to you in
your MyCITROËN personal space, via
the Internet website for your country.
.
Audio and Telematics
251
C5_en_Chap10a_BTA_ed01-2016
Localised Assistance Call
The fault with the system does not
prevent the vehicle being driven.
Press this button for more than
2 seconds to request assistance
if the vehicle breaks down.
A voice message confirms that
the call has been made**.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the request.
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
message.
Geo-location
You can deactivate geo-location by
simultaneously pressing the "Localised
Emergency Call" and "Localised Assistance
Call" buttons, followed by a press on "Localised
Assistance Call" to confirm.
To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously
press the "Localised Emergency Call" and
"Localised Assistance Call" buttons again,
followed by a press on "Localised Assistance
Call" to confirm.
If the orange indicator lamp is on fixed: the
back-up battery should be replaced.
In both cases, the emergency and assistance
calls service may not work.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched on,
the green indicator lamp comes
on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
If the orange indicator lamp
flashes then goes off: the system
has a fault.
If you purchased your vehicle outside
the CITROËN dealer network, we
suggest that you have a dealer check
and, if desired, modify the configuration
of these services.
In a multi-lingual country, configuration
is possible in the official national
language of your choice.
For technical reasons, particularly
to improve the quality of Telematic
services to customers, the
manufacturer reserves the right to
carry out updates to the vehicle's
on-board telematic system.
** Depending on the geographic cover for
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered by Telematic
services is available at dealers or
at www.citroen.co.uk.
.
Audio and Telematics
253
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
7-inch touch screen tablet
GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth
®
telephone
Contents
First steps 254
Steering mounted controls 256
Menus 257
Navigation 258
Navigation - Guidance 266
Traf c 270
Radio Media 272
Radio 278
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 280
Media 282
Settings 284
Connected services 292
MirrorLink
TM
292
CarPlay
®
296
Telephone 298
Frequently asked questions 306
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in
your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
The display of an energy economy mode message signals that
electrical systems operating are going into standby.
Refer to the energy economy mode section.
Audio and Telematics
254
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
First steps
Use the buttons arranged below the touch
screen tablet for access to the menu carousel,
then press the virtual buttons in the touch
screen tablet.
Each menu is displayed in one or two pages
(primary page and secondary page).
Secondary pagePrimary page
In very hot conditions, the system may
go into stand-by (screen and sound
completely off) for a minimum period of
5 minutes.
.
Audio and Telematics
255
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Volume adjustment (each source is
independent, including traffic announcements
(TA) and navigation instructions).
Mute the sound by pressing simultaneously on
the volume increase and reduce buttons.
Unmute the sound by pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
Press Menu to display the menu
carousel.
Increase volume.
Reduce volume.
Selecting the audio source (depending on
version):
- "FM" / "DAB"* / "AM"* stations.
- "USB" memory stick.
- Smartphone via MirrorLink
TM
or CarPlay
®
.
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth
®
* and
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming*.
- Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied).
* Depending on equipment.
Short-cuts: using the touch buttons in the upper
band of the touch screen tablet, it is possible to
go directly to the selection of the audio source
or the list of stations (or titles, depending on the
source).
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it
is necessary to press firmly, particularly
for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a
list, moving the map...). A simple wipe
will not be enough. Pressing with more
than one finger is not recognised.
The screen can be used when wearing
gloves. This technology allows use at
all temperatures.
In very high temperatures, the volume
may be limited to protect the system.
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment drops.
To clean the screen, use a soft
non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth)
without any additional product.
Do not use pointed objects on the
screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet
hands.
Audio and Telematics
256
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Steering mounted controls
Activate/deactivate "Black Panel"
mode - black screen (night driving).
Telephone: make a call.
Call in progress: access to the
telephone menu (end call, secret
mode, hands-free mode).
Telephone, press and hold: reject an
incoming call, end a call; when there
is no call in progress, access to the
telephone menu.
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
start voice recognition on your smartphone via
the system.
Radio, rotate: select the previous /
next preset station.
Media, rotate: select the previous /
next track.
Press: return to navigation.
Abandon the current operation.
Go up a level (menu or folder).
Display the menu carousel.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute.
Radio: automatic search for a higher
frequency.
Media: select the next track.
Media, press and hold: fast forward.
Jump in the list.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
Media: select the previous track.
Media, press and hold: rewind.
Jump in the list.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio, press and hold: update the list
of stations received.
Display the menu
carousel.
.
Audio and Telematics
257
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Menus
Settings
Radio Media
Navigation
DrivingConnected services Telephone
Adjust the settings for sound (balance,
ambience, ...) and the display (language, units,
date, time, ...).
Select an audio source, a radio station, display
photographs.
Enter navigation settings and choose a
destination.
Access to the trip computer.
Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain
vehicle functions.
Operate certain applications on your
smartphone via MirrorLink
TM
or CarPlay
®
.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth
®
.
Access to the CarPlay
®
function after
connection of your smartphone by USB cable.
(Depending on equipment)
(Depending on equipment)
Audio and Telematics
258
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Navigation
Navigation Route settings
.
Audio and Telematics
259
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Settings
Navigation
Enter destination Display recent destinations
Route settings
Fastest
Choose the navigation criteria.
The map displays the route chosen according to
these criteria.
Shortest
Time/distance
Ecological
Tolls
Ferries
Traffic
Strict-Close
Show route on map Display the map and start navigation.
Confirm Save the options.
Save current location Save the current address.
Stop navigation Delete the navigation information.
Voice synthesis
Choose the volume for voice and announcement
of street names.
Diversion
Detour from your initial route by a determined
distance.
Navigation
Display in text mode
Zoom in.
Zoom out.
Display in full screen mode.
Use the arrows to move the map.
Switch to 2D map.
Audio and Telematics
260
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
To use the telephone functions,
refer to the "Telephone" section.
For managing contacts and
their addresses, refer to the
"Telephone" section.
Navigation
Address
Enter destination
Contacts
.
Audio and Telematics
261
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Enter destination
Address
Current loc.
Address settingsPoint of interest
Town center
Save Save the current address.
Add waypoint Add a waypoint to the route.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Contacts
Addresses
Select a contact then calculate the route.
View
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
On the map Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Itinerary
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the
itinerary.
Stop Delete navigation information.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Audio and Telematics
262
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Search for a point of interest
Navigation
Point of interest displayed on the map
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
263
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Search for POI
All POIs
List of categories available.
After choosing the category, select the points of
interest.
Motor
Dining/hotels
Personal
Search Save the settings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Show POIs
Select all
Choose the display settings for POIs.Delete
Import POIs
Confirm Save the options.
Audio and Telematics
264
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Moving
between
the two
menus.
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Traffic messages
Settings
Diversion
Map settings
Navigation
Map settings
Settings
Settings
.
Audio and Telematics
265
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Traffic messages
On the route
Settings for the choice of messages and the
filter radius.
Around vehicle
Near destination
Detour
Detour over a distance
Recalculate route
Finish Save your selections.
Navigation
Secondary page
Map settings
Orientation
Flat view north heading
Choose the display and orientation of the
map.
Flat view vehicle heading
Perspective view
Maps
Aspect
"Day" map colour
"Night" map colour
Auomatic day/night
Confirm Save the settings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Settings
Route settings
Enter settings and choose the volume for the
voice and announcement of street names.
Voice
Alarm!
Traffic options
Confirm Save your selections.
Audio and Telematics
266
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Save" to save the address
entered as a contact entry.
The system allows up to 200 entries.
Select "Confirm".
Press on "Show route on map" to
start navigation.
Select "Address".
Select the "Country:" from
the list offered, then in the
same way the "City:" or its
post code, the "Road:", the
"N°:".
Confirm each time.
Select "Navigate to".
Choose the restriction criteria:
"Tolls", "Ferries", "Traffic", "Strict",
"Close".
Choose the navigation criteria:
"Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/
distance" or "Ecological".
To delete navigation information,
press on "Settings".
Press on "Stop navigation".
To resume navigation press on
"Settings".
Press on "Resume guidance".
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Towards a new destination
Or
.
Audio and Telematics
267
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Towards a recent destination
Select "Enter destination".
Select an address from
the list offered.
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Navigate to".
Towards a contact
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Contacts".
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select a destination from
the contacts in the list
offered.
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" to
start navigation.
To be able to use navigation "towards
a contact in the directory", it is first
necessary to enter the address for your
contact.
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or
press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
Audio and Telematics
268
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Towards GPS coordinates
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address".
Enter the "Longitude:"
then the "Latitude:".
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or
press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Towards a point on the map
Select "Enter destination".
Select "On the map".
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Zooming in on the map shows points with
information.
A long press on a point opens its content.
Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
categories.
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Search for POI".
Select "All POIs",
Or
"Motor",
Or
"Dining/hotels".
.
Audio and Telematics
269
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
An annual mapping update allows new
points of interest to be presented to
you.
You can also update the Risk areas /
Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on:
http://citroen.navigation.com.
Audio and Telematics
270
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Risk areas / Danger zone
alert settings
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Alarm!" (Alert).
It is then possible to activate Risk areas alerts
then:
- "Audible warning"
- "Alert only when navigating"
- "Alert only for overspeed"
- "Display speed limits"
- Timing: the choice of timing allows the
time before giving a Risk areas alert to be
defined.
Select "Confirm".
This series of alerts and displays is
only available if Risk areas have first
been downloaded and installed on the
system.
Trafc
Traffic information
Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Traffic messages".
Choose filter settings for:
"On the route",
"Around",
"Near destination", filters to fine-
tune the list of messages.
Press again to remove the filter.
.
Audio and Telematics
271
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Select the message from
the list offered.
Select the magnifying glass to have
voice information.
Setting lters
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Traffic options".
Select:
- "Be advised of new messages",
- "Speak messages".
Then enter the filter radius.
Select "Confirm".
We recommend a filter radius of:
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages on GPS-Navigation contain
traffic information transmitted in real
time.
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted,
the current audio source is interrupted
automatically to play the TA message.
Normal playback of the audio source
resumes at the end of the transmission
of the message.
Receiving TA messages
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Voice".
Activate / Deactivate
"Traffic (TA)".
Audio and Telematics
272
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Radio Media
Level 1 Level 2
List of FM stations
Save
.
Audio and Telematics
273
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Radio Media
List
List of FM stations Press on a radio station to select it.
Radio Media
Source
FM Radio
Select change of source.
DAB Radio
AM Radio
USB
MirrorLink
CarPlay
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Radio Media
Save (preset)
Press an empty location to Save it.
Audio and Telematics
274
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Photos
List of FM stations
.
Audio and Telematics
275
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page
Radio list
Save Press a radio station to select it.
Update list Update the list of stations received.
Frequency Enter the desired radio frequency.
Confirm Save the settings.
Radio Media
Secondary page
Photos
Home screen Display the selected photo in the home page.
Rotate Rotate the photo 90°.
Select all
Select all the photos in the list.
Press again to deselect.
Slideshow
Previous photo.
Display the photos in sequence, full-screen.
The system supports the following image formats:
.gif, .jpg, .bmp, .png.
Pause / Play.
Next photo.
Full screen Display the selected photo full-screen.
Audio and Telematics
276
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Settings
Settings
Settings
.
Audio and Telematics
277
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page
Media list
Presentation of the last media used.
Radio Media
Secondary page
Settings
Media
Settings
Shuffle (all tracks)
Choose the play settings.
Shuffle (current album)
Repeat
Aux. amplification
Radio
Settings
RDS options
Activate or deactivate the settings.
DAB/FM station tracking
Display Radio Text
Digital radio slideshow
display
Announcements
Settings
Traffic announcements (TA)
Activate or deactivate the settings.
News - Weather
Sport - Programm info
Flash - Unforeseen
events
Confirm Save the settings.
Audio and Telematics
278
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "Save".
If necessary, select change of
source.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select change source.
"AM Radio".
By automatic frequency search
Select "FM Radio".
"AM Radio".
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select a preset radio station
in the list.
Select "FM Radio".
Select a radio station from
the list offered.
Select "Update list" to refresh the
list.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "List" in the primary page.
Radio
Changing a radio frequencySelecting a station
To select a preset radio station.
THEN
Radio reception may be affected by
the use of electrical equipment not
approved by CITROËN, such as a USB
charger connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills,
buildings, tunnel, car park, below
ground...) may prevent reception,
even in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and is in no
way indicative of a fault with the audio
system.
Or
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
page.
Or
Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an
automatic search down or up for a radio
frequency.
Or
.
Audio and Telematics
279
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the
corresponding section).
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Radio".
Activate/deactivate "RDS
options".
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Press on "Save" (preset).
Select a number in the list to preset the
previously chosen radio station.
A long press on a number saves (presets) the
station.
Press on Frequency.
Enter the frequency in full (e.g.:
92.10 MHz) using the keypad then
"Confirm".
Changing radio station
Pressing the name of the current radio station
brings up a list.
To change radio station press the name of the
desired station.
Or
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "Save" (preset).
Presetting a station Activating / Deactivating RDS
OR
THEN
A press on this button presets all of
the stations one after the other.
Recalling preset stations
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio
stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of
reception of the station during a journey.
Audio and Telematics
280
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Display of options:
if active but not available, the display will be greyed out,
if active and available, the display will be blank.
Display of "Radiotext" for
the current station.
Select the audio source.
Display the "DAB" band.
Display of the name of the
current station.
Short-cut: access to the choice of audio
source and the list of stations (or titles,
depending on the source). Select the radio station.
Any thumbnail broadcast by
the station.
Preset stations,
buttons 1 to 15.
Short press: select the
preset radio station.
Long press: preset a radio
station.
Next "Multiplex".
Next radio station.
Secondary page.
Display the name and
number of the "multiplex"
service being used.
Previous "Multiplex".
Previous radio station.
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not
available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out.
Journaline
®
is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems.
It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics.
This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
.
Audio and Telematics
281
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Select change of source.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "DAB Radio".
Select "List" in the primary page.
Select the radio station from the list offered.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Radio".
Select "Digital/FM auto
tracking" then "Confirm".
DAB / FM auto trackingDigital radio
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
"DAB/FM station tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station
(if there is one).
If "DAB/FM station tracking" is
activated, there is a difference of a few
seconds when the system switches to
"FM" analogue radio with sometimes a
variation in volume.
When the digital signal is restored, the
system automatically changes back to
"DAB".
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception and also the graphical display
of current information on the radio
station being listened to. Select "List" in
the primary page.
The range of multiplexes available is
displayed in alphabetical order.
If the "DAB" station being listened to
is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM"
option greyed out), or "DAB/FM station
tracking" is not activated, the sound
will cut out while the digital signal is too
weak.
or
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
page.
Audio and Telematics
282
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
The audio system will only play audio files
with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" file
extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played.
".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type.
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
48 KHz.
Information and advice
Media
USB player Selection of source
Select change of source.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or on connection of a
USB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if
they are not modified, the subsequent loading
time will be shorter.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port
or connect the USB device to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
This source is only available if the "Auxiliary
socket" option has been activated in the
"Media" settings.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player…) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
First adjust the volume of your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
Display and management of the controls are
via the portable device.
Choose the source.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
.
Audio and Telematics
283
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using special characters
(e.g. " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and
displaying problems.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32
(file allocation table).
The system supports USB mass
storage portable players, BlackBerry
®
devices or Apple
®
players via USB
ports. The adaptor cable is not
supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
the audio system controls.
Other peripheral devices, not
recognised by the system on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied).
It is recommended that the USB cable
for the portable device is used.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows audio files on your telephone
to be played through the vehicle's speakers.
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone"
section, then "Bluetooth".
Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by
using the audio system buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode,
the telephone is considered to be a
media source.
It is recommended that you activate
"Repeat" on the Bluetooth
®
peripheral.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those
of the portable device connected
(artists / albums / genres / playlists /
audiobooks / podcasts).
The default classification used is by
artist. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu
then select the desired classification
(playlists for example) and confirm
to go down through the menu to the
desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
Audio and Telematics
284
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1
Settings
Level 2
Audio settings
Audio settings
Audio settings
.
Audio and Telematics
285
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Audio settings
Ambience Choose the sound ambience.
Balance Sound distribution using the Arkamys
®
system.
Sound effects
Set the volume or activate the link to vehicle
speed.
Ringtones Set the telephone ringtone and volume.
Voice
Set the volume and voice for speaking street
names.
Confirm Save your settings.
Settings
Turn off screen
Function that turns off the display.
Pressing the screen reactivates it.
Audio and Telematics
286
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Factory settings
Display screen
Configuration
Adjust date and time
Level 1 Level 2
.
Audio and Telematics
287
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page
System Settings
Delete data
Select the desired data in the list then press
Delete.
Factory settings Return to factory settings.
Confirm Save the settings.
Settings
Secondary page
Time/Date
Confirm Set the date and time then confirm.
Settings
Secondary page
Screen settings
Activate automatic text scrolling
Activate or deactivate the setting then confirm.Activate animations
Confirm
Audio and Telematics
288
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
CalculatorConfiguration
Calendar
Level 1 Level 2
.
Audio and Telematics
289
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page
Calculator
Select the calculator.
Settings
Secondary page
Calendar
Select the calendar.
Audio and Telematics
290
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Audio settings
Press on Settings to display the
primary page.
Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambience"
Or
"Balance"
Or
"Sound effects"
Or
"Ringtones"
Or
"Voice".
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound
Staging optimises sound distribution in
the passenger compartment.
The distribution (or spatialisation using
the Arkamys
®
system) of sound is an
audio process that allows the audio
quality to be adapted to the number of
passengers in the vehicle.
Available only with the 6-speaker
configuration.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass:,
Treble: and Loudness) are different
and independent for each sound
source.
The settings for Distribution and
Balance are common to all sources.
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical
ambiences)
- "Bass:"
- "Treble:"
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
- "Distribution" ("Driver", "All
passengers", "Front only")
- "Audible response from touch
screen"
- "Volume linked to speed"
(Activate/Deactivate)
.
Audio and Telematics
291
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Press on Settings to display the
primary page.
Press on "Settings" to display the
primary page.
Press on Settings to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary pagePress on the secondary page.
Select "System Settings". Select "Time/Date" to change the
time zone, the synchronisation with
GPS, the time and its format, then
the date.
Select "Screen settings".
Activate or deactivate "Activate
automatic text scrolling" and
"Activate animations".
Select "Delete data" to delete the
list of recent destinations, personal
points of interest, contacts in the list.
Select "Calculator" to display a
calculator.
Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Calendar" to display a
calendar.
Select "Factory settings" to return
to the original settings.
Modifying system settings
Audio and Telematics
292
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
MirrorLink
TM
Connected services
Optional depending on the
smartphone and operating system.
.
Audio and Telematics
293
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
MirrorLink
TM
technology to be displayed
in the vehicle's screen.
The principles and standards
are constantly evolving. For the
communication process between the
smartphone and the system to work
correctly, the smartphone must be
unlocked; update the operating system
of your smartphone as well as the date
and time in the smartphone and the
system.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the brand's internet website
in your country.
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
the vehicle is moving.
When connecting a smartphone to
the system, it is recommended that
Bluetooth
®
be started on the smartphone
Start the application on the
smartphone (optional, depending
on the smartphone and operating
system).
Access to the different audio sources remains
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons
During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain functions
are displayed.
Accept to start and end the
connection.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Press on "MirrorLink
TM
" to
start the application in the
system.
Once connection is established, an page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
to MirrorLink
TM
technology.
If only one application has been downloaded to
the smartphone, it starts automatically.
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
start voice recognition of your smartphone via
the system.
Voice recognition requires a compatible
smartphone connected to the vehicle by
Bluetooth
®
.
Voice recognition
Please note:
- if your smartphone is supported, to
make it "MirrorLink
TM
" compatible,
some phone manufacturers
nevertheless invite you to first
download a dedicated application.
From the system, press on
"Connected services" to display the
primary page.
Audio and Telematics
294
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
295
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Connected
services
MirrorLink
TM
Access or return to the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Access to a menu list depending on the
application chosen.
"Back": abandon the current operation, go up one
level.
"Home": access or return to the "Car mode" page.
Access to the "Connected services" primary
page.
Audio and Telematics
296
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
CarPlay
®
.
Audio and Telematics
297
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Press on "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
start voice recognition of your smartphone via
the system.
When the telephone menu is displayed,
connection of the USB cable causes the
display to automatically change to CarPlay
mode.
When another menu is displayed, on
connection of a USB cable a message is
displayed in the upper bar, indicating that
CarPlay mode has been activated.
Press Open to display CarPlay mode.
CarPlay
®
smartphone
connection
From the system, press on
"Connected services" to display the
primary page.
Connect the USB cable. The
smartphone is charged while
connected by the USB cable.
Or
Voice recognition
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
the vehicle is moving.
The synchronisation of a smartphone
allows applications on a smartphone
that are adapted to the CarPlay
®
technology to be displayed on the
vehicle's screen.
As the principles and standards are
constantly evolving, it is recommended
that you update the operating system of
your smartphone.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the brand's internet website
in your country.
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
During the procedure, one or more
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed on connection.
On connecting the USB cable, the
"Telephone" function changes to
"CarPlay" in the menu carousel.
Press on "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
Audio and Telematics
298
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1
Telephone
Level 2 Level 3
Contacts
Call log
.
Audio and Telematics
299
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
Call log
All calls
After making choices, start the call.
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Contacts
Magnifying glass
View
Create
Call
Telephone
Contacts
Addresses
After making choices, start the call.
View
Create
Modify
Delete
Delete all
By name
Confirm
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
Audio and Telematics
300
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Bluetooth (devices)
Telephone Options
Devices detected
Telephone connection
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
301
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Bluetooth
connection
Search
Start the search for another peripheral device to
connect.
Connect / Disconnect
Start or stop the Bluetooth
®
connection to the
selected peripheral device.
Update
Import the contacts from the selected telephone
to store them in the audio system.
Delete Delete the selected telephone.
Confirm Save the settings.
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Search
for devices
Devices detected
Telephone
Start the search for peripheral devices.Audio streaming
Internet
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Telephone Options
Put on hold
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the
contact cannot hear your conversation with a
passenger.
Update
Import the contacts from the selected telephone
to save then in the audio system.
Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Memory info.
Contact records used and free, percentage of
storage space used by internal contacts and
Bluetooth
®
contacts.
Confirm Save the settings.
Audio and Telematics
302
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
For reasons of safety and because they
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
the Bluetooth
®
mobile telephone to the
hands-free system of the audio system
must be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
Procedure (short) from the
telephone
In the Bluetooth
®
menu of your device, select
the system name in the list of devices detected.
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device
and confirm.
Enter this same code in the system,
select "OK" and confirm.
Procedure from the system
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
®
function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
configuration).
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search for devices".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the telephone is not detected, it is
recommended that you switch the Bluetooth
®
function on your telephone off and then on again.
Select the name of the
desired peripheral from the
list and "Confirm".
Enter a code of at least 4 figures for
the connection then "Confirm".
Enter this same code in the telephone then
accept the connection.
The system offers to connect the telephone:
- in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
playing of audio files from the telephone),
- in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
telephone is compatible with the "DUN"
Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth
®
standard).
Select one or more profiles and confirm.
.
Audio and Telematics
303
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
The services available depend
on the network, the SIM card and
the compatibility of the Bluetooth
®
telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider
for details of the services available to
you.
The ability of the system to connect
with only one profile depends on the
telephone. The three profiles may all
connect by default.
Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information
(compatibility, additional help, ...).
The recognised telephone
appears in the list.
Depending on your telephone, you may be
asked to accept automatic connection every
time the ignition is switched on.
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone
connected is present again, it is reconnected
automatically and within around 30 seconds
after switching on the ignition the pairing is
done without any action on your part, with
(Bluetooth
®
activated).
To modify the automatic connection mode,
select the telephone in the list then select the
desired profile.
Depending on the type of telephone,
the system will ask you to accept or not
the transfer of your contacts.
If not, select "Update".
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
On switching on the ignition, the telephone
connected when the ignition was last switched
off is automatically reconnected, if this
connection mode had been activated during the
pairing procedure.
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
message and the name of the telephone.
Manual connection
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
of paired peripherals.
Select the peripheral to connect.
Press on "Search for devices".
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
message and the name of the telephone.
Audio and Telematics
304
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Managing paired
telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Using the telephone is not
recommended while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering
mounted controls.
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
of paired peripheral devices.
Select the peripheral in the list.
Select "Search for devices"
Or
"Connect / Disconnect" to start or
end the Bluetooth connection with
the selected device.
Or
"Delete" to delete the pairing.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted TEL button to accept an
incoming call.
Make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button
to reject the call.
Or
Select "End call".
Making a call
Calling a new number
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
.
Audio and Telematics
305
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Select "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Select "Call".
Calling a recently used number
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Select "Call log".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; park the
vehicle first as a safety measure.
Managing contacts / entries
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Select "Contacts".
Select "View".
Select "Create" to add a new contact,
observing the "international format".
Or
"Modify" to edit the selected contact.
Or
"Delete" to delete the selected
contact.
Or
"Delete all" to delete all information
for the selected contact.
Select "By name" to view the list of
contacts.
Audio and Telematics
306
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is not
successful.
The navigation settings may conflict with the current location
(exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the settings in the "Navigation" menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Hazard zone audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation"
menu.
The system does not
suggest a detour around an
incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Traffic info" function in the list of
guidance criteria.
I receive a Accident-prone
area alert which is not on
my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Hazard zone
positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an
alert for a Hazard zone located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the Accident-prone area. Select "On the route" to
no longer receive alerts other than guidance or to
reduce the time for the announcement.
Frequently asked questions
Navigation
.
Audio and Telematics
307
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certain traffic jams along
the route are not indicated
in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive
the traffic information.
Wait until the traffic information is being received
correctly (display of the traffic information icons
on the map).
The filters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic filter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for
the traffic information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has completed starting
up, so that there is GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the
weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system
is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
Audio and Telematics
308
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Radio
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...)
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
I cannot find some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press and hold the "List" button at the steering
mounted controls to update the list of stations
received or press the "Update list" function in the
system.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
.
Audio and Telematics
309
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down
access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
catalogue time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my iPhone
as telephone and to the
USB port at the same time,
I am unable to play the
music files.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces
the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of
the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without
sound of the track being played with Apple
®
players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port
(the USB function takes priority over streaming).
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming files
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth
®
profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
Audio and Telematics
310
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing a sound
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
Settings
.
Audio and Telematics
311
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different
sound sources, which may result in audible differences when
changing source.
Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to the
sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"Linear", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after a
few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Audio and Telematics
312
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth
®
telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth
®
function may be switched off or the
telephone may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
®
function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth
®
telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
at www.citroen.co.uk (services).
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth
®
mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down, ...).
Some contacts are
duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the
contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both.
When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be
duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown in
alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not receive
SMS text messages.
The Bluetooth
®
mode does not permit sending SMS text messages
to the system.
Telephone
.
Audio and Telematics
313
C5_en_Chap10b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
.
Audio and Telematics
315
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Audio system
Audio system / Bluetooth
®
Contents
First steps 316
Steering mounted controls 317
Menus 318
Radio 318
Media 320
Telephone 324
Screen menu map(s) 326
Frequently asked questions 329
Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will only operate
in your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the
battery, the audio equipment may switch off after a few minutes.
Audio and Telematics
316
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
First steps
* Available according to version.
On / Off, volume setting.
Select source:
Radio; USB; AUX; CD; Streaming.
Display the list of local stations.
Long press: CD tracks or MP3 folders
(CD / USB).
Select the screen display mode:
Date, audio functions, trip computer,
telephone.
Audio settings:
Front/rear fader, left/right balance,
bass/treble, loudness, audio
ambiences.
The DARK button changes the
screen display for improved driving
comfort at night.
1
st
press: upper bar only illuminated.
2
nd
press: black screen.
3
rd
press: return to standard display.
Select next frequency down/up.
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
Select previous/next folder / genre /
artist / playlist (USB).
Abandon the current operation.
Confirm.
Buttons 1 to 6
Select a pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set a station.
Automatic frequency search down/
up.
Select previous/next CD, MP3 or
USB track.
Eject CD.
Display main menu.
TA (Traffic Announcements) on/off.
Long press: PTY* (radio Programme
TYpe).
Select AM / FM wavebands.
.
Audio and Telematics
317
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Steering mounted controls
Activate/deactivate "Black Panel" -
black screen mode (night driving).
Telephone: make a call.
Call in progress: access to the
telephone menu (display the calls
log).
Telephone, press and hold: reject an
incoming call.
Radio, rotate: select the previous /
next preset station.
Media, rotate: select the genre /
artist / folder in the classification list.
Press: Access to short-cut menus
depending on the display in the
screen, confirm a selection.
Abandon the current operation.
Go up one level (menu or folder).
Access to the main menu.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute.
Radio: automatic search for a higher
frequency.
Media: select the next track.
Media, press and hold: fast forward.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
Media: select the previous track.
Media, press and hold: rewind.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio, press and hold: update the list
of stations received.
Audio and Telematics
318
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Menus
Screen C
Audio functions
Radio; CD; USB; AUX.
Trip computer
Enter distances; Alerts; State of
functions.
Bluetooth
®
: Telephone - Audio
Pairing; Hands-free kit; Streaming.
Personalisation-configuration
Vehicle parameters; Display;
Languages.
For an overview of the menus available,
refer to the "Screen menu map"
section.
Radio
Selecting a station
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
radio.
Press the BAND AST button to
select a waveband.
Briefly press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
a manual search up / down for radio
frequencies.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally (30 stations maximum).
To update this list, press for more
than two seconds.
.
Audio and Telematics
319
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
RDS
The external environment (hills,
buildings, tunnels, basement car
parks, ...) may block reception,
including in RDS mode. This is a
normal effect of the way in which radio
waves are transmitted and does not
indicate any failure of the audio system.
Press the MENU button.
Select "Audio functions".
Press OK.
Select the "FM waveband
preferences" function.
Press OK.
Select "Activate RDS".
Press OK, RDS is displayed in the
screen.
In "Radio" mode, press OK directly to activate /
deactivate RDS mode.
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations
do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
explains the loss of reception of a station
that can occur during a journey.
Receiving TA messages
Press the TA button to activate or
deactivate traffic messages.
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted, the
current audio source (Radio, CD, ...)
is interrupted automatically to play the
TA message. Normal playback of the
audio source resumes at the end of the
transmission of the message.
Audio and Telematics
320
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Media
USB player
This unit consists of a USB port
and an auxiliary Jack socket,
depending on model.
Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port
or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB
port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
The system creates playlists
(temporary memory), which can take
from a few seconds to several minutes
on the first connection.
Reducing the number of non-music
files and the number of folders reduces
this waiting time. Playlists are updated
every time the ignition is switched off or
a USB memory stick is connected.
The lists are memorised: if the lists are
not changed, the subsequent loading
time is reduced.
Press and hold REFRESH LIST to
display the different classifications.
Select by "Folder" / "Artist" /
"Genre" / "Playlist".
Press OK to select the classification
required, then press OK again to
confirm.
Press REFRESH LIST briefly to
display the previously selected
classification.
Navigate through the list using the
left / right and up / down buttons.
Confirm the selection by
pressing OK.
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous / next track in
the list.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind.
Press one of these buttons to
gain access to the previous / next
"Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" /
"Playlist" in the list.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
.
Audio and Telematics
321
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, …) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume on
your audio system. Operation of controls is via
the portable device.
Do not connect a device to both the
Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port
at the same time.
CD player
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may
cause faults which are no reflection on the
quality of the vehicle's player.
Insert a CD in the player, play begins
automatically.
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of tracks on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind.
Audio and Telematics
322
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
The audio system will only play files with the
extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate
of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u, etc.) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters without using special characters
(e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or
CDRW, when recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2
or Joliet file format is recommended.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording
format is always used for an individual disc,
with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet format is recommended.
Information and advice
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of directories of the
MP3 compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind play.
Playing an
MP3 CD compilation
Insert an MP3 CD compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the
music tracks, which may take anything between
a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can
read up to 255 MP3 files spread over
8 folder levels. However, it is advisable
to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce
the access time before the CD is
played.
While the CD is being played, the folder
structure is not followed.
All of the files are displayed on a single
level.
.
Audio and Telematics
323
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32
(File Allocation Table).
It is recommended that you use
genuine Apple
®
USB cables for correct
operation.
* In certain cases, play of the audio files must
be initiated from the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows music files on the telephone
to be played via the audio system.
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone"
section.
Select in the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
menu the telephone to be connected.
The audio system connects to a newly paired
telephone automatically.
Control of tracks to be played is via the buttons
on the audio system control panel and the
steering mounted controls**. The contextual
information can be displayed in the screen.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE button*.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the
portable device connected (artists / albums /
genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts).
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
Audio and Telematics
324
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
Screen C
(Available according to model and version)
As a safety measure and because they
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
of the Bluetooth
®
mobile telephone with
the Bluetooth
®
hands-free system of
your audio equipment must be carried
out with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
Go to www.citroen.co.uk for more information
(compatibility, more help, ...).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
®
function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
configuration).
Press the MENU button.
In the menu, select:
- "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
- "Bluetooth configuration"
- "Perform a Bluetooth search"
A window is displayed with a message that a
search is in progress.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth
®
device
used.
Consult your telephone's manual and
your operator to find out which services
are available to you.
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed
in this window.
The "Telephone" menu permits access to the
following functions in particular: "Directory"*,
"Calls list", "Consult the paired equipment".
Select the telephone to be connected from the
list. Only one telephone can be connected at
a time.
A virtual keypad is displayed in the screen:
enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confirm by pressing OK.
A message in the screen indicates the telephone
chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the same
code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not
limited.
A message that the pairing has been
successful appears in the screen.
The automatic connection authorised is only
active after the telephone has been configured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed
after the necessary synchronisation period.
.
Audio and Telematics
325
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Select the YES tab on the display
using the buttons.
Confirm by pressing OK.
Press this button at the steering
mounted controls to accept the call.
Making a call
From the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
menu.
Select "Manage the telephone call".
Select "Call".
Or
Select "Calls list".
Or
Select "Directory".
Press this button for more than two
seconds for access to your directory,
then navigate using the thumbwheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
Ending a call
During a call, press this button for
more than 2 seconds.
Confirm with OK to end the call.
The system accesses the telephone's
contacts directory, depending on its
compatibility, and while it is connected
by Bluetooth
®
.
With certain telephones connected by
Bluetooth
®
you can send a contact to
the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
Audio and Telematics
326
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Screen menu map(s)
Screen C
Press the OK dial for access to
short-cut menus depending on the
display on the screen.
activate / deactivate RDS
activate / deactivate REG mode
activate / deactivate radiotext
Radio
activate / deactivate Intro
CD / MP3 CD
activate / deactivate track repeat
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate random play
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate track repeat
(of the current folder / artist / genre /
playlist)
USB
activate / deactivate random play
(of the current folder / artist / genre /
playlist)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
.
Audio and Telematics
327
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Screen C
Audio functions
Alternative frequencies (RDS)
Activate / deactivate
FM preferences
Regional mode (REG)
Activate / deactivate
Radio-text information (RDTXT)
Activate / deactivate
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
Play modes
Album repeat (RPT)
Activate / deactivate
Track random play (RDM)
Activate / deactivate
2
3
4
3
4
Pressing the MENU button displays:
Audio functions
Normal video
Brightness-video adjustment
Display conguration
Inverse video
Brightness (- +) adjustment
Date and time adjustment
Setting the day / month / year
Setting the hour / minute
Choice of 12 h / 24 h mode
Choice of units
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
°Celsius / °Fahrenheit
1
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
Personalisation-
conguration
Choice of language
1
Audio and Telematics
328
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Bluetooth conguration
1 1
1
2 2
2 2
2
3
3
3
2
3
Bluetooth: Telephone -
Audio
Telephone function
Delete a paired equipment
Connect/Disconnect an equipment
Audio Streaming function
Consult the paired equipment
Perform a Bluetooth search
Calls list
Call
Directory
Terminate the current call
Manage the telephone call
Activate secret mode
.
Audio and Telematics
329
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
audio system switches off
after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's
battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature
is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal
protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play
stopping.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
Frequently asked questions
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources
(radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound
sources, which may result in audible differences when changing
source (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
Radio
Audio and Telematics
330
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
The traffic announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any traffic
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information
network.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
information.
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, underground car parks...)
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through an automatic car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another
frequency giving better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
is too frequent and always on the same route.
.
Audio and Telematics
331
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth
®
connection
is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the USB memory stick.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain
any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot
play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is
not recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player
the right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD
cannot be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are
unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
Audio and Telematics
332
C5_en_Chap10c_RD45_ed01-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I am unable to access my
voicemail.
Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
Telephone
.
Alphabetical index
333
C5_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
Accessories ..................................................144
AdBlue
®
additive ......................32, 195, 196, 200
Adjusting headlamps .................................... 137
Adjusting head restraints ..........................60, 68
Adjusting seat ........................................... 60, 61
Adjusting the air distribution ........................... 72
Adjusting the air flow .......................................72
Adjusting the date ...........................................43
Adjusting the height and reach
of the steering wheel ....................................65
Adjusting the seat belt height ....................... 151
Adjusting the temperature ..............................72
Adjusting the time ...........................................43
Advice on driving .................................... 91, 180
Airbag, knee .................................................. 157
Airbags ............................................................35
Airbags, curtain ..................................... 156, 158
Airbags, front.................................................158
Airbags, lateral ...................................... 156, 158
Air conditioning ............................................... 12
Air conditioning, automatic ............................. 71
Air conditioning, digital ................................... 72
Air conditioning, manual ................................. 71
Air vents ..........................................................70
Alarm ............................................................... 49
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) .................... 147
Anti-pinch ..................................................52, 79
Anti-slip regulation (ASR).............. .......148, 150
Anti-theft .........................................................92
Armrest, front ..................................................83
Armrest, rear ...................................................84
Assistance call ......................................146, 250
A
B
C
Battery ................................... 179, 192, 235-238
Battery, charging ........................................... 237
Battery, remote control ............................. 47, 48
Blanking screen (snow shield) ...................... 184
Blind, panoramic sunroof ................................79
Blinds, side ......................................................85
BlueHDi .................................................195, 196
Bluetooth
®
(hands-free) ................302, 303, 324
Bluetooth
®
(telephone) ..........................302, 303
Bolts, wheel security ..................................... 214
Bonnet ........................................................... 185
Boot ........................................................... 57, 58
Boot (fittings) .............................................86, 87
Brake discs .................................................... 194
Brake lamps ..........................................222, 224
Brakes ........................................................... 194
Braking assistance system ........................... 147
Bulbs (changing) ...................218, 222, 224, 227
Audio streaming (Bluetooth
®
) .......282, 283, 323
Audio system ..........................................116, 315
Auxiliary ........................................................282
Cable, audio ..................................................282
Cable, jack ....................................................282
Capacity, fuel tank ........................................ 175
Cap, fuel filler ................................................ 175
CarPlay
®
connection .....................................297
CD, MP3 ........................................282, 321, 322
Central locking ..........................................45, 54
Changing a bulb ....................218, 222, 224, 227
Changing a fuse ............................................229
Changing a wheel ......................................... 211
Changing a wiper blade ................................ 143
Changing the remote control
battery ........................................................... 47
CHECK ............................................................20
Checking the engine oil level .......................... 24
Checking the levels .......................188, 190, 191
Checking tyre pressures (using the kit) ........204
Checks .................................. 186, 187, 192, 194
Child lock ................................................. 52, 173
Children ......................................... 166, 171, 172
Child seats ....................153, 159-161, 165, 168
Child seats, conventional ......................165, 166
Child seats, ISOFIX .......................169, 171, 172
CITROËN Connect Box ...............................250
CITROËN Localised Emergency Call...........250
Closing the boot .............................................. 45
Closing the doors ......................................45, 54
Compressor, tyre inflation ............................204
Configuration, vehicle ..................15, 37, 41, 326
Connection, Bluetooth
®
.........................302, 303
Connection, MirrorLink
®
........................292, 294
Control, electric windows ................................ 52
Control, emergency boot release ................... 57
Alphabetical index
334
C5_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
G
F
D
Gauge, fuel.............................................. 21, 175
Gearbox, automatic ........ 12, 105, 110, 193, 235
Gearbox, electronic ........................................ 12
Gearbox, manual .................... 12, 104, 110, 193
Gear shift indicator .......................................109
Gear lever ....................................................... 12
Gear lever, automatic gearbox .....................105
Gear lever, manual gearbox .........................104
Glove box ........................................................ 81
Filling the fuel tank ................................. 175-177
Filter, air ........................................................ 192
Filter, oil ......................................................... 192
Filter, particle ........................................ 191, 193
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Digital
radio ....................................................280, 281
Date (setting) ............................................. 37, 43
Daytime running lamps ......................... 135, 218
Deactivating ESP .......................................... 149
Deactivating the passenger airbag ....... 155, 162
Deadlocking ....................................................46
Demisting / Defrosting .................................... 72
Demisting / Defrosting,
rear screen....................................................72
Dimensions ................................................... 245
Dipstick ....................................................24, 188
Direction indicators ....................... 145, 218, 224
Display screen, instrument
panel ................................................14, 17, 109
Display screen, multifunction.......................... 37
Doors ...............................................................54
Driving economically....................................... 12
Filter, passenger compartment ..................... 192
Fitting a wheel ............................................... 214
Fitting roof bars ............................................. 182
Fittings, boot .............................................86, 87
Fittings, interior ............................................... 81
Fittings, rear ....................................................84
Flap, fuel filler ........................................ 175, 177
Flashing indicators ........................................ 145
Foglamps, front ............................................. 133
Foglamps, rear ..............................133, 222, 224
Folding the rear seats .....................................68
Frequency (radio) ..................................278, 279
Fuel.................................................. 12, 175, 176
Fuel consumption ............................................ 12
Fuel tank........................................................ 177
Fusebox, dashboard .....................................229
Fusebox, engine compartment .....................229
Fuses .............................................................229
Eco-driving (advice) ........................................ 12
Economy mode ............................................. 179
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) ... 147
Emergency braking assistance (EBA) .......... 147
Emergency call .....................................146, 250
Emergency warning lamps ........................... 145
Emissions control system, SCR .....................33
Energy economy mode ................................. 179
Engine compartment ............................186, 187
Engines, Diesel ..................... 176, 187, 243, 244
Engines, petrol ...................... 176, 186, 241, 242
Environment .............................................. 12, 48
E
Control, emergency door ................................56
Control, heated seats ......................................62
Control, panoramic sunroof blind ...................79
Control stalk, lighting .................................... 132
Control stalk, wipers ..............................140-142
Courtesy lamps ............................................... 76
Cruise control ................................................ 121
Cup holder .................................................83, 84
Driving positions (storing) ...............................64
Dynamic stability control (DSC) ......29, 148, 150
.
Alphabetical index
335
C5_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
Key with remote control ................44, 45, 48, 92
Kit, hands-free ..............................302, 303, 324
Kit, temporary puncture repair ......................204
Jack ....................................................... 211, 282
Jump starting ................................................236
Identification, vehicle ....................................249
Ignition .............................................................94
Immobiliser, electronic ..............................48, 92
Indicator, AdBlue
®
range ...............................196
Indicator, coolant temperature ........................ 21
Indicator, engine oil level ................................ 24
Indicator, engine oil temperature .................... 21
Indicator lamps, operation ..................29, 34, 36
Indicators, direction ...................................... 145
Inflating tyres ..........................................12, 204
Instrument panels ........................................... 14
Isofix mountings ............................................ 169
I
H
K
J
L
Labels, identification .....................................249
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) ....................................................... 124
Level, brake fluid ...........................................190
Level, Diesel additive .................................... 191
Level, engine coolant .............................. 21, 190
Level, engine oil ...................................... 24, 188
Level, headlamp wash .................................. 191
Level, power steering fluid ............................190
Levels and checks .................186-188, 190, 191
Level, screenwash fluid ................................ 191
Lighting ............................................................77
Lighting, dashboard ........................................ 25
Lighting dimmer ..............................................25
Lighting, directional ...............................138, 139
Lighting, guide-me home ...................... 135, 136
Lighting, interior .............................................. 76
Lighting, mood ................................................77
Lighting, welcome ...........................................77
Loading ........................................................... 12
Localised Assistance Call .............................250
Locating your vehicle ...................................... 47
Locking from the inside ...................................54
Log, alerts .......................................................20
Luggage cover ...............................................88
M
Maintenance, routine ...................................... 12
Map reading lamps .........................................76
Markings, identification .................................249
Massage function ...........................................63
Mat ..................................................................82
Menu ............................258, 260, 264, 272, 274,
276, 284, 286, 288, 298, 300
Menu, main ............................................. 15, 318
Menus (audio) ............................... 272, 274, 276
Menus (Touch screen tablet) ................253, 257
Mirror, rear view .............................................. 67
Hazard warning lamps .................................. 145
Headlamp adjustment ................................... 137
Headlamps, automatic illumination ......133, 136
Headlamps, dipped beam ..................... 132, 218
Headlamps, directional ..........................137, 139
Headlamps, main beam ........................ 132, 218
Headlamps, Xenon ....................................... 218
Headlamp wash ............................................ 141
Head restraints, front ................................60, 62
Head restraints, rear .......................................68
Heating ............................................................ 12
Hill start assist ............................................... 103
Horn....................................................... 116, 146
Alphabetical index
336
C5_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
Mirrors, door....................................................66
Misfuel prevention ......................................... 177
Mountings, Isofix ........................................... 169
MP3 CD .........................................................322
Pads, brake ................................................... 194
Paint colour code ..........................................249
Panoramic glass sunroof ................................ 79
Parking brake ....................................95, 96, 194
Parking brake, electric ..............................28, 96
Parking sensors, front ................................... 127
Parking sensors, rear.................................... 127
Parking space sensor .................................. 125
Plates, identification......................................249
Player, Apple
®
.......................................283, 323
Player, MP3 CD ..................................... 321, 322
Player, USB ...........................................282, 320
Port, USB ........................................83, 282, 320
Pressures, tyres ....................................205, 249
Pre-tensioning seat belts .............................. 153
Priming the fuel system ................................203
Protecting
children ................ 159-161, 166, 169, 171, 172
Puncture ........................................................204
P
R
Radio .....................................278, 279, 282, 318
Radio, digital (Digital Audio
Broadcasting - DAB) ...........................280, 281
Range, AdBlue
®
.................................... 196, 197
RDS ...............................................................279
Reading lamps, rear ........................................ 76
Recharging the battery ................................. 237
Navigation .....................................258, 260, 264
Net, high load retaining ...................................89
Number plate lamps ......................................226
Safety, children ..............159-162, 166, 169, 172
Screen, cold climate ..................................... 184
Oil change ..................................................... 188
Oil consumption ............................................188
Oil, engine ..................................................... 188
Opening the bonnet ...................................... 185
Opening the boot ............................................44
Opening the doors ....................................44, 54
Opening the fuel filler flap ............................. 175
Opening the panoramic sunroof blind ............ 79
N
S
O
Recirculation, air ............................................. 72
Regeneration of the particle filter ................. 193
Reinitialising the electric windows .................. 52
Reinitialising the remote control ..................... 47
Reminder, key in ignition .................................94
Reminder, lighting on .................................... 134
Remote control ....................................44, 45, 48
Removing a wheel ........................................ 214
Removing the mat ........................................... 82
Replacing bulbs ....................218, 222, 224, 227
Replacing fuses ............................................229
Replacing the air filter ...................................192
Replacing the oil filter ................................... 192
Replacing the passenger compartment filter ...192
Reservoir, headlamp wash ........................... 191
Reservoir, screenwash ................................. 191
Resetting the service indicator ....................... 23
Resetting the trip recorder .............................. 25
Rev counter ..................................................... 14
Reversing camera ......................................... 129
Reversing lamp .....................................222, 224
Risk areas (update) .......................................269
Roof bars ....................................................... 182
Running out of fuel (Diesel) ..........................203
.
Alphabetical index
337
C5_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
T
Table of weights ....................................242, 244
Tables of engines .................................. 241, 243
Tables of fuses ..............................................229
Tank, fuel ............................................... 175, 177
Technical data ........................................241-245
Telephone .....................298, 300, 302-304, 324
Temperature, coolant ...................................... 21
Three flashes (direction indicators) .............. 145
Time (setting) ............................................ 37, 43
TMC (Traffic info) .......................................... 270
Tools ...................................................... 204, 211
Total distance recorder ...................................25
Screen, instrument panel .............15, 17, 20, 116
Screen menu map ............... 258, 260, 264, 272,
274, 276, 284, 286, 288, 298, 300, 326
Screen, monochrome C .................. 37, 318, 326
Screenwash, front ......................................... 141
Screenwash, rear .......................................... 141
SCR (Selective Catalytic
Reduction) ..................................................195
Seat belts ....................................... 151-153, 165
Seats, front ..........................................60, 61, 64
Seats, heated ............................................60, 62
Seats, rear .......................................................68
Securing rings .................................................86
Serial number, vehicle ..................................249
Service indicator .......................................22, 23
Servicing ................................................... 12, 23
Settings, equipment .....................15, 37, 41, 326
Settings (Menus) ...........................284, 286, 288
Settings, system ............................................ 291
Sidelamps .............................132, 218, 222, 224
Side repeater ................................................ 218
Ski flap ............................................................85
Snow chains .................................................. 178
SNOW MOTION............................................148
Socket, 12 volt accessory ...............................84
Socket, auxiliary ....................................282, 321
Socket, JACK ..................................83, 282, 321
Soft distribution ............................................... 70
Speed limiter ................................................. 118
Speedometer .................................................. 14
Starting the engine .........................................92
Starting using another battery ......................236
Station, radio .........................................278, 279
Stay, bonnet ..................................................185
Steering mounted controls, audio ........ 256, 317
Steering wheel, adjustment ............................ 65
Steering wheel, fixed centred controls ......... 116
Stopping the vehicle .......................................92
Stop & Start ...........................19, 35, 71, 75, 110,
175, 185, 192, 235, 238
Storage compartments ................................... 81
Storing driving positions ................................. 64
Sun visor ......................................................... 81
Suspension, electronic control ..................... 130
Suspension, Hydractive III+ .......................... 130
Switching off the engine ................................. 92
Synchronising the remote control ................... 47
Touch screen tablet ...............18, 39, 41, 42, 116
Touch screen tablet
(Menus) ....................... 18, 39, 41, 42, 253, 257
Towbar ........................................................... 180
Towed loads ..........................................242, 244
Towing another vehicle .................................239
Towing eye ....................................................239
Traction control (ASR) ............................29, 148
Traffic information (TA) ......................... 271, 319
Traffic information (TMC) .............................. 270
Trailer ............................................................ 180
Trajectory control systems ............................ 148
Trip computer ............................................. 17-19
Trip distance recorder .....................................25
Trip reset ....................................................17, 18
Tyres ................................................................ 12
Tyre under-inflation detection ................114, 217
U
Unlocking ........................................................44
Unlocking from the inside ...............................54
Updating risk areas .......................................269
Updating the date ............................................ 43
Updating the time ............................................43
USB .......................................................282, 322
Alphabetical index
338
C5_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
V
W
Warning and indicator lamps .........26, 28,34, 36
Warning lamp, airbag ......................................35
Warning lamp, SCR emissions control
system ...........................................................33
Warning lamp, Service....................................27
Weights .................................................242, 244
Welcome function ........................................... 63
Wheel, spare ..........................................211, 217
Window controls .............................................52
Wiper blades (changing) ............................... 143
Wiper, rear..................................................... 141
Wipers ................................................... 140, 142
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive ........... 140, 142
Ventilation ........................................... 12, 70, 71
Very cold protection ...................................... 183
Voice recognition ..................................293, 297
05-16
C5_en_Chap12_couverture_ed01-2016
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the
provisions of the European regulation (Directive 2000/53)
relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the
objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials
are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document
is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles
CITROËN.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Interak
C5_en_Chap12_couverture_ed01-2016
16.C5.0040
Anglais
*16.C5.0040*
